JP4776468B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, and more specifically, based on the fact that a variable display start condition is satisfied after a variable display execution condition is satisfied, a plurality of types of identification information that can be individually identified The present invention relates to a gaming machine having variable display means for variably displaying, and having a specific gaming state advantageous to a player after the display result of identification information becomes a predetermined specific display result.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, it can be changed by displaying predetermined identification information (hereinafter referred to as a display symbol) on a display device such as a liquid crystal display (hereinafter referred to as “LCD”) by updating or scrolling. There are a number of games that have been enhanced by a so-called variable display game that performs variable display and determines whether or not to give a predetermined game value based on the display result.

  Some variable display games are played by using the above display device as an image display device. In such a variable display game, the change of the display symbol is started based on the detection of the game ball passing through the start winning opening (the execution condition of the variable display is satisfied), and the stop when the change of the display symbol is completely stopped. A game in which a case of a symbol (determined symbol) is a specific display mode is a “big hit”. In the variable display game, when a “hit” is made, a special electric combination called a big prize opening or an attacker is opened, and a state in which a game ball can be won extremely easily is provided to a player for a certain period of time. This state is referred to as “specific game state” or “hit game state”.

Here, as a technique for causing an image to be displayed on a display device, there has been proposed a technique in which the resolution is converted and displayed when the resolution of input image data is different from the resolution of the display device (see, for example, Patent Document 1).
Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004-117752

For example, as a gaming machine that displays image data that has been subjected to VGA processing on a display device having XGA resolution, image data is generated by interpolating data between pixels in acquired video data. It has been proposed (see, for example, Patent Document 2).
JP 2005-143940 A

  The techniques described in Patent Document 1 and Patent Document 2 are all for improving the image quality of the display device. For this reason, it has not been considered to improve the use efficiency of a storage device or storage area for storing image data.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a storage device that stores image data and a gaming machine that can improve the use efficiency of a storage area.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 of the present application has a variable display execution condition (for example, a game ball has won a start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6 in the pachinko gaming machine 1). Or the operation of the start lever 505 becomes effective due to the fact that the bet amount has been set in the slot machine 500 or that a re-gamer such as a replay has been won in the previous game). After being established, a variable display start condition (for example, when the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state by the special symbol display device 4 is ended in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the game is executable in the slot machine 500) Based on the fact that the operation of the start lever 505 was detected by the start lever switch 505A) Provided with variable display means (for example, special symbol display device 4 or the like) that variably displays other information (for example, special symbols), the display result of the identification information has become a predetermined specific display result (for example, jackpot symbol) An image display means (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that is set to a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state or the like) that is advantageous to the player later, and displays various images including a plurality of types of effect images (for example, First and second image display devices 5A, 5B, etc.), a game control CPU (eg, CPU 114) that controls the progress of the game, and display information determined by the game control CPU (eg, variable display start command, A display control CPU (for example, CP) that controls the display operation of the image display means based on a display control command such as a jackpot start command. 131), image data storage means (for example, image data memory 142) for storing a plurality of types of image data corresponding to a plurality of types of effect images, and a control command (for example, a display control command) by the display control CPU. And an image processor (for example, VDP 141) that creates display data based on the image data read from the image data storage means, and then displays an effect image on the image display means based on the display data. The image data stored in the image data storage means includes first image data (for example, in the main sprite image data area 142A) configured to have a smaller number of pixels than the total number of pixels corresponding to the image display means. Stored image data for SVGA # 01-01 to # 01-XX) and the first image data Unlike the corresponding number of pixels, the second image data (for example, an image for VGA stored in the main sprite image data area 142A) is configured corresponding to a smaller number of pixels than the total number of pixels corresponding to the image display means. Data # 02-01 to # 02-XX, image data # 21-01 to # 21-XX stored in the main moving image data area 142C), and the image processor reads out from the image data storage means Display data creation means (for example, a drawing circuit 155) for creating display data based on the image data, and an effect image corresponding to the display data created by the display data creation means, the display control CPU The image display as an effect image of the total number of pixels corresponding to the image display means enlarged at a predetermined magnification according to a predetermined command from Display control means (for example, a display circuit 158) to be displayed in a row, and the display control CPU responds to a progress of the game with a predetermined image switching condition (for example, a probabilistic gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state) Transition to the normal game state after the transition to the probability variation gaming state, the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes reach, etc.), the effect image to be displayed on the image display means, Effect image switching determination means for determining to switch between the effect image corresponding to the first image data and the effect image corresponding to the second image data (for example, the part where the CPU 131 executes the processing of steps S501 and S503, Corresponding to the determination result by the effect image switching determination means, and the enlarged display processing means in advance. An image switching enlargement ratio changing means for transmitting a predetermined command to change the enlargement ratio of the effect image (for example, a portion where the CPU 131 executes the processing of steps S502 and S505, a portion where the processing of step ST102 is executed, etc.) In response to the determination result by the effect image switching determining means, the image switching for changing the image data read from the image data storage means between the effect image corresponding to the first image data and the effect image corresponding to the second image data. (after eg the CPU131 executes the processing of steps S502, S505, step S506, S518, etc. portions for performing the process of S555) readout data changing means when the saw including a said image processor further the image data storage Temporary storage means that can temporarily store image data read from the means (for example, temporary storage memo 156), display data creation means for creating display data based on the image data temporarily stored in the temporary storage means (for example, the drawing circuit 155), and the image read from the image data storage means Corresponding to the activation of the display control CPU (for example, the transfer control circuit 152) for controlling the transfer of data to the temporary storage means, the storage area in the temporary storage means is changed to a predetermined storage area. Storage area setting means for setting a plurality of areas including (for example, a portion in which the transfer control circuit 152 executes the storage area setting process in step S603 according to the storage area setting command process in step S52 by the CPU 131), The display control CPU further sets the storage area by the storage area setting unit and then stores it in the image data storage unit. Of the plurality of types of stored image data, image data whose execution frequency of image display by the effect image corresponding to the image data is higher than the execution frequency of image display by the effect image corresponding to the required image data, Start-up data transfer command means for commanding transfer to a storage area other than a predetermined storage area (for example, the part where the CPU 131 executes a pre-transfer command process in step S53), the reading position of image data, and the display Production image update command means for informing the image processor of the writing position in the data storage means and commanding the update of the production image (for example, the image update command processing as shown in FIG. 46 by the CPU 131 in step S518 or step S555) Etc.), and the transfer control means receives the command from the start-up data transfer command means. The execution frequency of the image display by the effect image corresponding to the required image data is the execution frequency of the image display by the effect image corresponding to the image data among the plurality of types of image data stored in the image data storage means. Start-up data transfer means for reading image data higher than the frequency from the image data storage means and transferring it to a storage area other than the predetermined storage area in the temporary storage means (for example, a pre-transfer command in step S53 by the CPU 131) Depending on the process, the transfer control circuit 152 includes a part that executes the pre-transfer process in step S605) and the image data read-out position notified from the effect image update command unit is included in the image data storage unit In addition, image data is read from the reading position in the image data storage means and stored in the temporary storage means. Normal-time data transfer means for transferring to the predetermined storage area (for example, the part in which the transfer control circuit 152 executes the automatic transfer control processing in step S607), and the display-data creating means includes the normal-time data After the image data is transferred to the predetermined storage area by the transfer means, the image data is read from the predetermined storage area and written to the writing position in the display data storage means notified from the effect image update command means. The first data writing processing means (for example, the part where the drawing circuit 155 executes the automatic transfer drawing process of step S705) stored in step S3, and the reading position of the image data notified from the effect image update instruction means are stored in the temporary storage. Update the effect image by reading out the image data from the reading position in the temporary storage means when included in the means Second data write processing means (for example, the part where the drawing circuit 155 executes the fixed address designation drawing process in step S703) to be written and stored in the writing position in the display data storage means notified from the command means; characterized by including Mukoto.

3. The gaming machine according to claim 2, further comprising a movable member (for example, a movable member 60) capable of shielding a part of a display area on the display screen of the image display means, wherein the display control CPU is a game progress state. Whether or not the movable member is shielded when a predetermined shielding switching condition (for example, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes reach in the variable display pattern of “super reach”) is established. Corresponding to the determination result by the shielding switching determining means (for example, the part where the CPU 131 determines the effect control process timer value based on the effect control pattern of “super reach”) for determining to switch, and the shielding switching determining means , the enlargement display processing means to the predetermined command transmitted by the changing the magnification of the effect image shielding changeover magnification changing means (e.g. CPU13 , When the movable member 60 is retracted as shown in FIG. 76B based on a predetermined effect control pattern, the enlarged display setting command is transmitted from the input / output port 135 to the VDP 141), and the shielding switching. Corresponding to the determination result by the determining means, the image data read from the image data storage means is changed between the effect image corresponding to the first image data and the effect image corresponding to the second image data. Changing means (for example, the image data corresponding to the VGA mode is used during the period in which the movable member 50 is advanced, whereas the image data corresponding to the SVGA mode is used during the period in which the movable member 50 is retracted) ).

4. The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the display control CPU causes the image display unit to display the display result of the variable display before the display result of the variable display is derived after the variable display of the identification information is started. The variable display display switching determining means (for example, the effect control pattern shown in FIG. 67 is used by the CPU 131 to determine that the image is switched between the effect image corresponding to the first image data and the effect image corresponding to the second image data. In response to the determination result by the variable display switching determination unit in step S555, the predetermined command is transmitted to the expansion display processing unit to expand the effect image. Variable display enlargement ratio changing means for changing the ratio (for example, the part where the CPU 131 executes the process of step ST102 in the process of step S555) The image data read from the image data storage means is changed between the effect image corresponding to the first image data and the effect image corresponding to the second image data in accordance with the determination result by the variable display switching determination means. Read data changing means during variable display to be performed (for example, a portion in which the VDP 141 executes the process of step ST104 in accordance with the process of step S103 by the CPU 131).

  5. The gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein the display control CPU sets a data bus width when the image processor reads predetermined image data from the image data storage means to a first bus width (for example, a 64-bit width). First bus width setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 131 transmits a display setting command for start of change to the VDP 141 from the input / output port 135 in step S502), and the image processor stores the image data storage means. The second bus width setting means (for example, the CPU 131) sets the data bus width when reading image data other than the predetermined image data from the second bus width (for example, 32 bit width) different from the first bus width. That transmits a multi-view setting command from the input / output port 135 to the VDP 141 in steps ST53 and ST73. Etc.) and a.

  6. The gaming machine according to claim 5, wherein the display control CPU corresponds to image data having a large number of pixels among the first and second image data when the enlargement ratio of the effect image in the enlargement display processing means is large. High-resolution image display determination means (for example, a portion where the CPU 131 transmits an enlarged display setting command from the input / output port 135 to the VDP 141 in step ST102) for determining that the effect display image is displayed on the image display means. In response to the determination by the high-resolution image display determining means, the image processor reads out image data having a large number of pixels from the first and second image data from the image data storage means, and sends it to the image display means. High-resolution display processing means for displaying effect images (for example, the VDP 141 responds to an enlarged display setting command from the CPU 131) From the memory chip 142-1 and 142-2 includes a portion or the like) for reading the image data.

7. The gaming machine according to claim 6, wherein the display control CPU shifts to a predetermined selection condition (e.g., transitions to a probable gaming state after the end of a big hit gaming state, or transitions to a normal gaming state after the probable gaming state ends. The display image of the effect image is selected from a plurality of display modes, and the effect display image is displayed on the image display unit in accordance with the selected display mode of the effect image. Effect mode switching determining means (for example, the part where the CPU 131 executes the processing of steps S501 and S503) for determining that the effect image corresponding to the first image data and the effect image corresponding to the second image data are switched. and the like), in response to the determined result by the representation embodiment switching determining means, Starring for changing the magnification of the effect image and transmitting the predetermined command to the enlargement display processing means The image data to be read from the image data storage means in response to the determination result by the aspect switching enlargement ratio changing means (for example, the part where the CPU 131 executes the processes of steps S502 and S505) and the effect aspect switching determining means. Effect mode switching read data changing means for changing between the effect image corresponding to the one image data and the effect image corresponding to the second image data (for example, after the CPU 131 executes the processing of steps S502 and S505, step S506, And the like for executing the processing of S518 and S555).

8. The gaming machine according to claim 7 , wherein the display control CPU has a predetermined transfer condition (for example, it is determined Yes in step S557 when the number of executions of the special figure game has reached a predetermined number). As a result, among the plurality of types of image data stored in the image data storage means, the image display execution frequency by the effect image corresponding to the image element data is the image display by the effect image corresponding to the required image data. The transfer condition establishment command means for instructing transfer of image data higher than the execution frequency to a storage area other than the predetermined storage area (for example, a part where the CPU 131 executes a pre-transfer command process in step S558, etc.) The transfer control means is stored in the image data storage means in response to a command from the transfer condition establishment command means. Among the plurality of types of image data, the image data having a higher frequency of image display by the effect image corresponding to the image data than the image display execution frequency by the effect image corresponding to the required image data Transfer means when the transfer condition is satisfied, which is read from the data storage means and transferred to a storage area other than the predetermined storage area in the temporary storage means (for example, in response to the advance transfer instruction processing in step S558 by the CPU 131, the transfer control circuit 152 A portion for executing the advance transfer process in step S605).

9. The gaming machine according to claim 8 , wherein the transfer control means receives transfer completion data (for example, data indicating a transfer completion flag) indicating that data transfer from the image data storage means to the temporary storage means has been completed. Transfer completion data setting means (for example, the transfer control circuit 152 executes the processing of steps S626 and S636 for setting in a storage management table (for example, the index table 250) that can specify the image data temporarily stored in the temporary storage means. The display data creation means stores the display data stored in the display data storage unit according to whether transfer completion data is set in the storage management table. Creation determination means for determining whether or not to create display data by writing to the means (example) Situ drawing circuit 155 includes a portion, and so on) that perform the processing of steps S712, S732.

10. The gaming machine according to claim 9 , wherein the display control CPU shifts to a predetermined determination condition (e.g., transitions to a probable gaming state after the end of a big hit gaming state, or transitions to a normal gaming state after the probable gaming state ends. Correspondingly, after the CPU 131 executes the processing of steps S501 to S505, the image corresponding to the display mode of the effect image determined by the establishment of the portion that executes the processing of step S506) is established. Among a plurality of types of image data stored in the data storage means, the execution frequency of the image display by the effect image corresponding to the image data is higher than the execution frequency of the image display by the effect image corresponding to the required image data. Data specifying means for specifying image data (for example, the CPU 131 determines Yes in step S501 or step S501 Corresponding to the determination of Yes in 03) and the image data specified by the data specifying means in response to the determination condition being satisfied, in response to the determination condition being satisfied. Including a determination condition satisfaction command means (for example, a portion where the CPU 131 executes the process of step S153) for instructing transfer to a storage area other than the storage area, and the transfer control means includes the determination condition satisfaction instruction means In response to a command from the image data storage means, among the plurality of types of image data, an effect image corresponding to the required image data has an execution frequency of image display by an effect image corresponding to the image data. The image data higher than the image display execution frequency is read out from the image data storage means and the temporary storage means Transfer means when a determination condition is satisfied, which is transferred to a storage area other than the predetermined storage area (for example, a part where the transfer control circuit 152 executes a pre-transfer process in step S605 in accordance with the process of step S153 by the CPU 131) .

  The present invention has the following effects.

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the image data storage means includes the first image data and the second image data configured corresponding to a smaller number of pixels than the total number of pixels corresponding to the image display means. It is remembered. Then, when a predetermined image switching condition is established corresponding to the progress of the game, the effect image switching determining unit displays the effect image displayed on the image display unit as the effect image corresponding to the first image data and the second image. A decision is made to switch between effect images corresponding to the image data. Corresponding to this determination result, the image switching enlargement ratio changing means changes the enlargement ratio of the effect image in the enlarged display processing means, and the image data read by the image switching read data changing means is read from the image data storage means as the first image. The effect image corresponding to the data is changed between the effect image corresponding to the second image data.
As a result, the data capacity is reduced as compared with the case where image data configured corresponding to the same number of pixels as the total number of pixels corresponding to the image display means is stored in the image data storage means and used to display the effect image. Therefore, the storage capacity in the storage means such as the image data storage means can be reduced. Then, by switching the effect image when the image switching condition is satisfied and changing the enlargement rate and the image data, it is possible to display the effect image with an appropriate enlargement rate and image data according to the gaming state in the gaming machine. The effect of display can be enhanced and the interest of the game can be improved.
In addition, image data whose execution frequency of the image display by the effect image corresponding to the image data is higher than the execution frequency of the image display by the effect image corresponding to the required image data is started The data transfer means transfers the data to a storage area other than the predetermined storage area in the temporary storage means in response to the activation of the display control CPU. When the read position of the image data notified from the effect image update command means is included in the image data storage means, the normal data transfer means reads the image data from the read position in the image data storage means and temporarily stores the data. After the image data is transferred to the predetermined storage area, the first data reading / processing unit reads the image data from the predetermined storage area, and writes and stores it in the writing position in the display data storage means. On the other hand, when the read position of the image data notified from the effect image update command means is included in the temporary storage means, the second data reading processing means reads the image data from the read position in the temporary storage means and displays it. The data is written and stored in the writing position in the data storage means.
Thus, for image data transferred to a predetermined storage area in the temporary storage means, if the reading position in the image data storage means and the writing position in the display data storage means are designated, the storage position in the temporary storage means It can be used to create display data without specifying the address, address management becomes easy, and the burden of program design can be reduced. On the other hand, for the image data in which the execution frequency of the effect by the corresponding effect image is set higher than the execution frequency of the effect by the effect image corresponding to the required image data, the reading position in the temporary storage means is designated. Thus, the data already stored in the temporary storage means can be easily reused, and it is not necessary to read out each time from the image data storage means, so that the control burden in the display effect can be reduced.

In the gaming machine according to claim 2, when a predetermined shielding switching condition is established corresponding to the progress of the game, the shielding switching determining unit is configured to display one of the display areas on the display screen of the image display unit by the movable member. A decision is made to switch whether or not to block the part. Corresponding to this determination result, the shielding switching magnification changing means changes the effect image magnification in the enlarged display processing means, and the shielding switching readout data changing means reads the image data read from the image data storage means by the first image. The effect image corresponding to the data is changed between the effect image corresponding to the second image data.
Thus, by switching whether or not a part of the display area is shielded by the establishment of the shielding switching condition and changing the enlargement ratio and image data, an appropriate enlargement ratio and image according to the gaming state in the gaming machine An effect image can be displayed by data, and the effect of the image display can be enhanced and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine according to claim 3, after the variable display of the identification information is started and before the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed, the effect image to be displayed on the image display means is the first image data. The variable display switching determination unit determines whether to switch between the corresponding effect image and the effect image corresponding to the second image data. Corresponding to the determination result, the variable display enlargement ratio changing means changes the enlargement ratio of the effect image in the enlargement display processing means, and the variable display reading data changing means reads the image data read from the image data storage means by the first image. The effect image corresponding to the data is changed between the effect image corresponding to the second image data.
Thereby, by changing the effect image and changing the enlargement rate and image data when the variable display of the identification information is performed, the effect image of the effect image based on the appropriate enlargement rate and image data in the gaming machine is changed. The display can be performed, and the effect of the image display can be enhanced and the entertainment of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine according to claim 4, while setting the data bus width when reading predetermined image data to the first bus width, the data bus width when reading image data other than the predetermined image data is set. The second bus width is set different from the first bus width.
Thus, the image data can be processed with an optimum configuration and processing speed by changing the bus width according to the image data capacity and processing load.

In the gaming machine according to claim 5, when the enlargement ratio of the effect image is large, image data having a large number of pixels is read out from the image data storage means among the first and second image data, and the image data is supported. The effect image to be displayed is displayed on the image display means.
Thereby, it is possible to prevent the image quality from being lowered when the effect image is enlarged, and to enhance the effect of the display by enhancing the effect of the image display.

In the gaming machine according to claim 6, in response to the display mode of the effect image determined when the predetermined determination condition is satisfied, the effect mode switching determination unit displays the effect image to be displayed on the image display unit, A determination is made to switch between the effect image corresponding to the first image data and the effect image corresponding to the second image data. Corresponding to this determination result, the enlargement rate changing means at the time of effect mode switching changes the enlargement ratio of the effect image in the enlarged display processing means, and the image data read out from the image data storage means by the read data change means at the time of effect mode switching The effect image corresponding to one image data is changed between the effect image corresponding to the second image data.
As a result, it is possible to display the effect image with the enlargement ratio and the image data suitable for the display mode of the effect image, it is possible to prevent the image quality from being lowered, and the effect of the image display is enhanced to improve the interest of the game. be able to.

In the gaming machine according to claim 7 , the transfer means when the transfer condition is established is stored in the image data storage means in response to a command from the transfer condition establishment command means based on the establishment of the predetermined transfer condition. Out of a plurality of types of image data, image data having an execution frequency of image display using an effect image corresponding to the image data is read out higher than an image display execution frequency using an effect image corresponding to the required image data. Transfer to a storage area other than the storage area.
As a result, an error due to noise or the like occurs in the storage contents of the temporary storage means for image data whose execution frequency of the image display by the corresponding effect image is higher than the execution frequency of the image display by the effect image corresponding to the required image data. Even in such a case, the stored contents can be automatically restored.

In the gaming machine according to claim 8 , the creation determining means writes the image data read from the temporary storage means into the display data storage means in accordance with whether or not transfer completion data is set in the storage management table. Determines whether or not to create display data according to.
This makes it possible to match the image data transferred from the image data storage means to the temporary storage means and the image data read from the temporary storage means and used to create display data. The used display effect can be performed.

In the gaming machine according to claim 9 , the data specifying means is stored in the image data storage means corresponding to the display mode of the effect image of the gaming machine determined when the predetermined determination condition is satisfied. Among the plurality of types of image data, the image data execution frequency of the effect image corresponding to the image data is higher than the image display execution frequency of the effect image corresponding to the required image data. The establishment command means commands transfer of the image data specified by the data specifying means. Then, the transfer means when the determination condition is satisfied reads the image data from the image data storage means and transfers it to a storage area other than the predetermined storage area in the temporary storage means in response to a command from the determination condition satisfaction command means.
Thereby, the image data to be transferred and stored in a storage area other than the predetermined storage area in the temporary storage means can be changed corresponding to the display mode of the effect image, and control in the display effect can be made by effectively using the temporary storage means. The burden can be further reduced.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. A special symbol display device 4 for variably displaying (variably displaying) a plurality of types of special symbols each identifiable is provided at a predetermined position in the game area. The installation position of the special symbol display device 4 is not limited to a predetermined position in the game area, and may be a predetermined position outside the game area.

  A first image display device 5A for displaying various images including a plurality of types of effect images (first effect images) is provided at the center position of the game area in the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. In addition to the first image display device 5A, a second image display device 5B that displays various images including a plurality of types of effect images (second effect images) is provided. The installation positions of the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B are not limited to the central position of the game area. For example, the first image display apparatus 5A is installed at the central position of the game area, while the second The image display device 5B may be installed at an arbitrary position in the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as outside the gaming area or at the front upper part, lower front part, and front side of the gaming machine frame 3.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1, a normal symbol display device 20 is provided below the first image display device 5A. In addition, an ordinary variable winning ball device 6 that forms a start winning port and a special variable winning ball device 7 that forms a big winning port are arranged at the center lower part of the game area in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The special symbol display device 4 includes, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs. In the special symbol game as the variable display game, the special symbol display device 4 variably displays, for example, a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, and the like. For example, after the execution condition for variably displaying the special symbol is established by the game ball winning in the start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6, for example, the previous special game is ended. Or a start condition for variably displaying a special symbol such as the fact that the big hit gaming state has ended is started. A plurality of types of special symbols variably displayed in the special symbol display device 4 are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. For example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numerical values indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Has been. The special symbol display device 4 variably displays more types of symbols such as numbers indicating “00” to “99” in order to make it difficult for the player to grasp a specific stop symbol. It may be configured to.

  The first and second image display devices 5A and 5B may be configured by, for example, an LCD or the like and perform screen display by a dot matrix method using a large number of pixels (pixels). In this embodiment, the display screen in the first image display device 5A has a total number of pixels corresponding to the XGA mode (1024 × 768 pixels). The display screen in the second image display device 5B has a total number of pixels corresponding to the QVGA mode (Quarter-VGA; 320 × 240 pixels). On the display screen of the first image display device 5A, in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game by the special symbol display device 4, for example, in the variable display unit as a display area divided into three, the special symbol Different types of decorative symbols that can be distinguished from each other are variably displayed. On the display screen of the second image display device 5B, it is possible to display predetermined information related to the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Here, as the predetermined information regarding the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, the model name or manufacturer name of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the big hit probability or the small hit probability (spec) in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 Is one of the following information: a game procedure, a probability of winning a big hit when various reach performances are made (reach reliability), and a description of a character appearing during a game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 It only has to be included.

  In the first image display device 5A, for example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” variable display units are arranged, and each special symbol game is executed by the special symbol display device 4, and The decorative design is variably displayed on the variable display section. That is, when the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display device 4 is started, the variable display of the decorative symbols (“left”, “middle”, “right”) on the first image display device 5A ( For example, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game by the special symbol display device 4, the “left”, “ The fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed (derived display) in each of the “middle” and “right” variable display sections. In addition, each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” variable display portions can be moved within the display area of the first image display device 5A so that the decorative symbols can be displayed in a reduced or enlarged manner. It may be.

  In each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” variable display portions in the first image display device 5A, for example, nine types of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “9” or Chinese numerals “one” to “nine”) , English characters “A” to “I”, nine character images related to a predetermined motif, combinations of numbers, letters, symbols, and character images, etc. Note that character images include, for example, people, animals, and the like. An object, a symbol such as a character, or a decorative image showing any other figure may be displayed) as a decorative pattern in a variable manner. In addition to the nine types of decorative symbols, the symbols variably displayed on each variable display section include blank symbols (designs that do not constitute a jackpot combination). A corresponding symbol number is assigned to each of the decorative symbols. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “9” are assigned to alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “9”, respectively.

  When variable display of decorative symbols is started in the first image display device 5A, the variable display portions “left”, “middle”, and “right” can switch display from, for example, from small to large symbols. When the scroll display is performed and the decorative symbol having the maximum symbol number “9” is displayed, the decorative symbol having the minimum symbol number “1” is displayed. Alternatively, when a display design with a smallest symbol number “1” is displayed by performing switching display or scrolling display from the largest symbol number to the smallest symbol number, the next largest symbol number is “9”. A certain decorative pattern may be displayed.

  The first image display device 5A also displays a special symbol start memory display for displaying the number of reserved memories (the number of special figure reserved memories) as the number of effective winning balls won in the start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6. An area may be provided. In the special symbol start memory display area, a winning display is performed in response to an effective start winning when the special figure reservation storage number is less than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). As a specific example, when 1 is added to the special figure reservation storage number, one of the display parts that is normally blue (for example, the leftmost display part among the display parts that are blue) is displayed in red. Change. On the other hand, when 1 is subtracted from the special figure hold storage number, one of the display parts displayed in red (for example, the display part at the right end of the display part displayed in red) is returned to blue display. . Alternatively, in the special symbol start storage display area, a number indicating the special figure reserved memory number may be displayed so that the player or the like can recognize the special figure reserved memory number. You may make it provide the indicator (special symbol start memory display) which displays the number of special symbol reservation memory together with the special symbol start memory display area or instead of the special symbol start memory display area.

  The normal symbol display device 20 is configured to include, for example, a light emitting diode (LED), and the execution condition is that a game ball that has passed through a passing gate 25 provided in the gaming area is detected by the gate switch 21 (FIG. 3). In the normal game, the lighting, blinking, coloring, etc. are controlled.

  The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6 includes an electric tulip-type accessory (a normal tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces which are controlled to move between a vertical (normally open) position and a tilt (enlarged open) position by a solenoid 81 (FIG. 3). It has an electric accessory) and forms a start winning opening. The game ball that has entered the starting winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6 is detected by the starting opening switch 22 (FIG. 3), and based on the detection, a special symbol and a decorative symbol are displayed in a variable manner. The execution condition (start condition) is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the start port switch 22, a predetermined number (for example, four) of prize balls are paid out.

  The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes an opening / closing plate that opens and closes a large winning opening serving as a winning area by a solenoid 82 (FIG. 3). When a game ball enters the big prize opening opened by the opening / closing plate in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, a predetermined number is determined based on the detection of the gaming ball by the count switch 23 (FIG. 3). A prize ball of (for example, “15”) is paid out.

  In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill with a built-in lamp, an out port, and the like. Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 is provided at the periphery of the game area. A decorative LED may be provided around each structure (for example, the normal variable winning ball device 6, the special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  In the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 20, when the normal symbol variable display is started and then displayed in a predetermined hit pattern, the display result is “win” (normal hit), and the normal variable winning ball device The movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting 6 is controlled to the tilting position (enlargement opening control), and is controlled to the vertical position (normal opening control) when a predetermined time elapses.

  In the special symbol game by the special symbol display device 4, after the special symbol variable display is started, when the predetermined time elapses, the fixed special symbol that is the variable symbol variable display result is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, the “big hit” is displayed as a specific display result, and if a special symbol other than the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it is “lost”. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state as the specific gaming state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment, as a specific example, a special symbol indicating “3” or “7” is a big hit symbol and a special symbol indicating “−” is a lost symbol.

  When the special symbol “3” or “7”, which is a big hit symbol, is a special symbol “3” or “7” in the special symbol game by the special symbol display device 4, as a variable display result of the decorative symbol on the first image display device 5 A, for example, The fixed decorative symbols constituting the predetermined jackpot combination are stopped and displayed on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” variable display portions. For example, if the same decorative pattern is stopped and displayed on the active line set in advance in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” variable display parts, Good.

  The special symbol “3” or “7”, which is a big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed in the special symbol game by the special symbol display device 4, and the big hit combination is confirmed as a variable display result of the decorative symbol in the first image display device 5A. Corresponding to the symbol being stopped and displayed, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state. In this big hit gaming state, the open / close plate of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is large during a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) or a period until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. Open the winning opening. In this way, the open / close plate having the open state for the grand prize winning opening receives the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2 and enters the winning prize opening. Thus, one round is completed by making the grand prize opening open and then closing. In the big hit gaming state in this embodiment, the round as the opening / closing cycle of the big prize opening can be repeated until reaching a predetermined number of times, for example, 15 times.

  The special symbols “3” and “7” that are stopped and displayed as jackpot symbols in the special symbol game by the special symbol display device 4 include the normal jackpot symbol “3” and the probability variation jackpot symbol “7”. Among the decorative symbols whose symbol numbers are “1” to “9” that are variably displayed on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” variable display portions in the first image display device 5A, the symbol number is an odd number. While certain “1”, “3”, “5”, “7”, “9” decorative symbols are used as probability variation symbols for probability variation big hits, symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “ The decorative symbols of “6” and “8” are used as normal symbols for normal big hits.

  For example, when the confirmed special symbol is normally the big hit symbol “3” in the special symbol game by the special symbol display device 4, “left”, “middle” is displayed as the variable display result of the decorative symbol in the first image display device 5A. ”And“ Right ”, the same normal symbols are all stopped and displayed on the effective lines set in the variable display portions, and become a fixed decorative symbol of the normal jackpot combination. As described above, when the special jackpot symbol “3” is stopped and displayed as a variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, and the decorative symbol of the normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed, the special display among the specific display results is displayed. Usually a big hit other than the result.

  On the other hand, when the confirmed special symbol becomes “7” in the special symbol game by the special symbol display device 4, the “left” is displayed as the variable display result of the decorative symbol in the first image display device 5A. , “Middle”, “Right”, the same probability variation symbols are all stopped on the active line set in the variable display section, and become a fixed decorative symbol of probability variation big hit combination. In this way, when the probability variation jackpot symbol “7” is stopped and displayed as a variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, and the decorative symbol of the probability variation jackpot combination is stopped and displayed, the special display among the specific display results is displayed. Probability big hit included in the result.

  When the variable display result of a special symbol or decorative symbol is a probable big hit, after the big hit gaming state based on the big hit is finished, the probability variation control (probability changing control) is continued as one of the special gaming states. It is controlled to the probability variation gaming state to be performed. In this probability-changing gaming state, the probability that the display result in the special display game or variable symbol variable display becomes “big hit” and is further controlled to the big hit gaming state is improved as compared to the normal gaming state. The normal gaming state is a gaming state other than a special gaming state such as a big hit gaming state or a special gaming state such as a probability variation gaming state, and the probability that the variable display result of a special symbol or a decorative symbol will be a big hit, It is controlled in the same manner as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a predetermined return process is not executed after power-on as in the case where a system reset is performed). In this embodiment, after entering the probability variation gaming state, one of the conditions is satisfied: a special number of games (for example, 100 times) is executed and the variable display result is a big hit. Sometimes the probable gaming state ends. On the other hand, regardless of the number of executions of the special figure game, the probability variation gaming state may continue until the variable display result is a big hit. In addition, even before the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times in the probability variation game state or before the variable display result is a big hit, the probability variation game state ends at a predetermined rate when the special figure game is started. There may be.

  In addition, after the big hit gaming state based on the fact that the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a probable big hit, the special game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) and variable display is performed. The time reduction state in which the time reduction control (time reduction control) is continuously performed until one of the conditions is satisfied among the cases where the result is a big hit may be made. In the time reduction state where the time reduction control is performed, the variable display time, which is the time from the start of variable display of the special symbol in the special game to the time when the fixed special symbol resulting in the display is stopped and displayed, is greater than the normal game state. Is also controlled to be shorter. In addition, after the big hit gaming state based on the fact that the variable display result of special symbols and decorative symbols has become a promising big hit, the time is reduced along with the probable gaming state, whereas it is usually based on the big hit After the big hit gaming state is ended, the time may be reduced without entering the probability variation gaming state. Or, after the big hit gaming state based on the fact that the winning jackpot is ended, the time saving state is not entered, but the promising gaming state is ended, whereas the big hit gaming state based on the normal hitting is ended. Later, the time may be reduced instead of the probability variation gaming state.

  In the probability variation game state and the time shortening state, the variable display time in the normal diagram game by the normal symbol display device 20 is shorter than that in the normal game state, and the probability that the display result becomes a winning symbol in each normal diagram game is improved. To do. At this time, the tilting time of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6 is longer than that in the normal gaming state, and the number of tilts is increased compared to that in the normal gaming state. Thus, in the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening state, the gaming state is advantageous to the player, which is different from the big hit gaming state. Here, if the probability variation control is not performed in the time shortening state, the probability that the display result will be a big hit in the special display game or the variable display of the decorative pattern each time is the same as in the normal gaming state, so the probability variation game The state is more advantageous for the player than the time saving state.

  In the normal game state, the effective lines on which the decorative image variable display result is stopped and displayed on the first image display device 5A are, for example, “left” and “middle” as shown in FIG. , The horizontal direction consisting of only the upper stage, only the middle stage, and only the lower stage of each “right” variable display section, and the middle stage and “right” variable display of the upper stage and “middle” variable display section of the “left” variable display section. In the diagonal direction consisting of the lower stage in the section, or in the diagonal direction consisting of the lower stage in the “left” variable display section, the middle stage in the “middle” variable display section, and the upper stage in the “right” variable display section. Yes. On the other hand, during the probability change in the probability change gaming state, the active line has a decorative symbol 1 on each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” variable display portions as shown in FIG. 2B, for example. By stopping and displaying one by one, only one is defined in the horizontal direction. At this time, the decorative symbols on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” variable display portions are displayed larger than in the normal gaming state.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various control boards such as a main board 11 and an effect control board 12 as shown in FIG. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a signal relay board 13 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are disposed on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 11 performs lighting / extinguishing control of each segment constituting the special symbol display device 4 to control the special symbol variable display by the special symbol display device 4, and to turn on / off the normal symbol display device 20. It also has a function of controlling variable display of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the variable symbol display of the normal symbol display device 20 by turning off / coloring control.

  The main board 11 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 101 that receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100, and the game control microcomputer 100. A solenoid circuit 102 that outputs a drive signal for each of the solenoids 81 and 82 according to the command is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 3, wiring for receiving detection signals from the gate switch 21, the start port switch 22, and the count switch 23 is connected to the main board 11. Note that the gate switch 21, the start port switch 22, and the count switch 23 may have any configuration that can detect a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor. In addition, the main board 11 is provided with wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing tilt control of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6 to the solenoid 81 and opening / closing control of the opening / closing plate in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7. A wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing the operation to the solenoid 82 is connected. Further, the main board 11 is connected to a wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control of the special symbol display device 4 and the normal symbol display device 20.

  A control signal output from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the signal relay board 13. The main board 11 is provided with a main board side connector corresponding to, for example, the signal relay board 13, and an output buffer circuit is connected between the main board side connector and the game control microcomputer 100. The output buffer circuit can pass a signal only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the signal relay board 13 and prevents the signal from being input from the signal relay board 13 to the main board 11. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 12 or the signal relay board 13 side to the main board 11 side.

  The signal relay board 13 only needs to be provided with a transmission direction regulation circuit for each wiring for transmitting a control signal output from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, for example. Each transmission direction regulation circuit includes a diode having an anode connected to the main board connector corresponding to the main board 11 and a cathode connected to the presentation control board connector corresponding to the presentation control board 12, and one end connected to the cathode of the diode. And a resistor having the other end connected to the ground (GND). With this configuration, each transmission direction regulating circuit can prevent signals from being input from the effect control board 12 to the signal relay board 13 and pass signals only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. . Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 12 side to the main board 11 side. In this embodiment, a transmission direction regulating circuit is provided for each wiring for transmitting a control signal in the signal relay board 13, and an output buffer is provided between the game control microcomputer 100 and the main board side connector on the main board 11. By providing the circuit, it is possible to prevent an illegal signal from being input to the main board 11 from the outside.

  The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the signal relay board 13 is an effect control command transmitted as an electric signal, for example. The effect control command is used, for example, to control a display control command used for controlling the display operation of the first image display device 5A or the second image display device 5B, or an audio output from the speakers 8L, 8R. A sound control command, a lamp control command used for controlling the lighting operation of the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED, and the like are included. The display control command includes display information determined by the CPU 114 (FIG. 5) of the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11 side, for example. Here, as the display information determined by the CPU 114, for example, as the display contents in the special symbol display device 4, the special symbol variable display time and the fixed special symbol resulting in the variable display result, the special symbol variable display pattern, or, for example, The display contents in the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B may be information related to display operations in various display devices, such as information indicating any one of the variable display time and variable display pattern of the decorative design. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. The command form shown in FIG. 4 is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 4, the command 80XXH is a variable display start command transmitted when starting the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game by the special symbol display device 4. XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variable display start command, different EXT data is set according to the variable display pattern of the special symbol or the decorative symbol and the type of the variable display result. For example, whether the variable display result is “losing”, “ordinary big hit”, or “probable big hit” is different according to the result determined in advance before the variable display result is derived and displayed. EXT data is set. Even if the types of the variable display results are the same, different EXT data is set if the variable display patterns are different. In this embodiment, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal gaming state, the variable display pattern for displaying the fixed combination of the lost combination is derived as a variable display pattern without the decorative display variable display mode being reached. Several types of loss patterns are available. It should be noted that the definite decorative symbol of the combination of lost combinations is a definite decorative symbol of a combination different from the predetermined decorative symbol of a predetermined combination such as a jackpot combination. In addition, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probabilistic gaming state, a plurality of shortened losing patterns are provided as variable display patterns for deriving and displaying the fixed decorative pattern of the losing combination without the decorative display variable display mode being reached. Kinds are available. Further, a plurality of types of reach patterns are prepared as variable display patterns for deriving and displaying a definite decorative combination of a jackpot combination or a lost combination after the decorative display variable display mode is set to reach.

  Here, “reach” refers to a decorative symbol that has not yet been derived and displayed when the decorative symbol derived (stopped or temporarily stopped) displayed on the first image display device 5A constitutes a part of the jackpot combination. Reach variation design) is a display mode in which variation display is performed, or a display mode in which all or part of the decorative symbols are variably displayed synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination It is. Specifically, the variable on the active line that has not been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbols constituting the predetermined jackpot combination are stopped and displayed on some variable display portions on the predetermined active line. Display mode in which variable display is performed on the display unit (for example, the “left”, “right” variable display units among the “left”, “middle”, “right” variable display units provided in the display area Is a part of the jackpot combination (for example, a decorative pattern indicating “7” alphanumeric characters) and the “medium” variable display section is still in a variable display state), or , A display mode in which all or part of the decorative symbols on the active line are displayed in a synchronized manner while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination (for example, “left” provided in the display area) , “Medium”, “Right” variable display section in all variable display section It is performed a display mode change display in a manner that is aligned the same decoration pattern Whichever conditions display is performed). Also, during the reach, unusual effects may be performed with lamps or sounds. This production is called reach production. In addition, during the reach, the first image display device 5A displays a character image (effect image imitating a person or the like) different from the decorative design, changes the display mode of the background, or displays the decorative design in a variable manner. It may change the aspect. This change in character display, background display mode, and decorative pattern variation mode is referred to as reach effect display.

  In the variable display start command, different EXT data is set in accordance with the variable display pattern, and the variable designation result is different from the variable display start command. ”Or“ probability big hit ”may be notified of the type of variable display result.

  A command 9F00H shown in FIG. 4 is a demonstration display command for displaying a demonstration image (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the first image display device 5A or the second image display device 5B. The command A000H is a jackpot start command indicating that the jackpot gaming state is started based on the fact that the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a jackpot. The command A1XXH is a jackpot round number notification command indicating the number of rounds started in the jackpot gaming state. In the jackpot round number notification command, different EXT data is set in accordance with the number of rounds started in the jackpot gaming state.

  A command B000H shown in FIG. 4 is a jackpot end command indicating that the jackpot gaming state is ended. The command C000H is a probability change start command indicating that control for changing the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the probability change game state is started. The command C001H is a probability change end command indicating that the control for changing the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the probability change game state is ended. The command D0XXH includes the number of effective winning balls won in the starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6 in order to perform a winning display in a special symbol start memory display area provided in the first image display device 5A. This is a reserved memory number notification command for notifying the special figure reserved memory number. In the pending storage count notification command, different EXT data is set corresponding to the special figure pending storage count.

  FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11. A game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 5 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a clock circuit 111, a reset / interrupt controller 112, a random number circuit 113, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 114, and a ROM (Read Only). Memory (RAM) 115, RAM (Random Access Memory) 116, timer circuit (PIT) 117, serial communication circuit (SCI) 118, and input / output port 119. In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 114 executes a program read from the ROM 115, thereby executing a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, the CPU 114 reads fixed data from the ROM 115, the CPU 114 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 116 and temporarily stores them, and the CPU 114 temporarily stores various fluctuation data temporarily stored in the RAM 116. The CPU 114 receives the input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the input / output port 119, and the CPU 114 receives the input of various signals from the game control microcomputer 100 via the input / output port 119. A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside is also performed.

  The clock circuit 111 is a circuit that generates a clock signal to be supplied to each circuit in the game control microcomputer 100 such as the CPU 114. As a specific example, the clock circuit 111 divides an external clock input to a predetermined clock input terminal by 4 to generate an internal system clock CLK. This is supplied to each circuit in the computer 100.

  The reset / interrupt controller 112 is for controlling various reset and interrupt requests generated in the game control microcomputer 100. The reset controlled by the reset / interrupt controller 112 includes a system reset and a user reset. The system reset is a reset that occurs when a low level signal is input to a predetermined SRST terminal for a certain period. For user reset, a low-level signal is input to a predetermined URST terminal for a certain period, a time-out signal of a watchdog timer (WDT) is generated, or an out-of-designated-area travel prohibition (IAT) signal is generated Or a reset caused by a predetermined factor such as the occurrence of an interval reset signal.

  The interrupts controlled by the reset / interrupt controller 112 include four types of interrupts such as an X class interrupt (XIRQ), an I class interrupt (IRQ), a software interrupt (SWI), and an illegal opcode trap (ILGOP). . The X class interrupt is an interrupt that occurs when a low level signal is input to a predetermined XIRQ terminal for a certain period. The I-class interrupt is an interrupt that can permit / prohibit acceptance of an interrupt request by a user program. A low-level signal is input to a predetermined IRQ terminal for a certain period of time, or an interrupt request signal from the timer circuit 117 is received. This is an interrupt generated by various predetermined interrupt factors such as the occurrence of an interrupt request signal from the serial communication circuit 118.

  The random number circuit 113 is a circuit that generates all or part of various random numbers used on the main board 11 side. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value used on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, on the main board 11 side, a random value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining a probability variation, a random value MR3 for determining a variable display pattern, a reach A random number value MR4 for determination is used, and control is performed so that numerical data indicating these random number values can be counted. In order to enhance the gaming effect, random numbers other than these may be used on the main board 11 side. Numerical data indicating all or part of these random number values MR1 to MR4 may be counted by the random number circuit 113. Further, the numerical data indicating a part of the random number values MR1 to MR4 may be counted by updating by the software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 113 by the CPU 114.

  The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether the variable symbol display result of the special symbol is a big hit or a loss. For example, the random number MR1 is in a range of “1” to “65535”. Takes a value. That is, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is used for determining whether or not to control the big hit gaming state when the big hit is generated. The random number value MR2 for the probability variation determination, when it is determined that the variable symbol display result of the special symbol is a big hit, the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state is set to the normal gaming state or the probability varying gaming state. This is a random value used to determine whether the value is in the range of “1” to “60”, for example. That is, the random number value MR2 for determining the probability variation is used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is the normal jackpot or the probability variation jackpot.

  The random value MR3 for determining the variable display pattern is a random number value for display used to determine the variable display pattern of the special symbol or the decorative symbol as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. For example, “1” A value in the range of “150” is taken. The reach determination random value MR4 is a random value used for determining whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is to be reached when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is lost, For example, a value in the range of “1” to “239” is taken.

  In addition to the game control user program, the ROM 115 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various data tables used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 115 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables and determination tables prepared for the CPU 114 to perform various determinations and determinations. The decision table includes a big hit decision table that is referred to in order to decide whether or not to make a variable display result a big hit with a confirmed special symbol in a special figure game as a big hit symbol, and a normal big hit when the variable display result is a big hit. Probability change determination table referred to determine whether or not to make a probable big hit, normal hit determination table referred to determine whether or not the display result in the normal figure game is “winning”, a special symbol, A reach determination table that is referred to for determining whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is to be reached when the variable symbol variable display result is lost may be included. The determination table stored in the ROM 115 only needs to include a variable display pattern determination table for determining variable display patterns for special symbols and decorative symbols.

  The variable display pattern determination table stored in the ROM 115 associates each variable display pattern with a random value MR3 for determining the variable display pattern, for example, so that the variable display pattern is determined based on the random value MR3 for determining the variable display pattern. What is necessary is just to be comprised from the data for determination etc. which enable selection. The data indicating each variable display pattern in the variable display pattern determination table is, for example, in the variable display pattern determination table or in a variable display pattern setting table different from the variable display pattern determination table. The variable display time is associated with data indicating the variable display time, which is the time from the start of variable display to the derivation and display of the fixed special symbol and the fixed decorative symbol.

  As a specific example of the variable display pattern determination table, in this embodiment, the big hit pattern determination table 200A shown in FIG. 7A, the reach-losing pattern determination table 200B shown in FIG. 7B, and FIG. A normal-time loss pattern determination table 200 </ b> C shown in FIG. 7C and a probability variation during-change pattern determination table 200 </ b> D shown in FIG. 7D are stored in the ROM 115.

  The jackpot pattern determination table 200A shown in FIG. 7A is based on a random display value MR3 for determining a variable display pattern when it is determined that a variable display result of a special symbol or a decorative symbol is a jackpot. One of a plurality of types of reach patterns can be selected and determined. The reach-losing pattern determination table 200B shown in FIG. 7B determines that the decorative symbol variable display mode is reached when it is determined that the special symbol or decorative symbol variable display result is lost. Corresponding to this, it is configured so that one of a plurality of types of reach patterns can be selected and determined based on the random value MR3 for determining the variable display pattern. The normal-time losing pattern determination table 200C shown in FIG. 7C reaches the variable display mode of the decorative symbol when it is determined that the special symbol or the decorative symbol variable display result is lost in the normal gaming state. Corresponding to the determination of not to be made, one of a plurality of types of normal loss patterns can be selected and determined based on the random value MR3 for variable display pattern determination. The probability change losing pattern determination table 200D shown in FIG. 7 (D) reaches the variable display mode of decorative symbols when it is determined that the variable display result of special symbols or decorative symbols is lost in the probability changing gaming state. Corresponding to the determination of not to be made, one of a plurality of types of shortened loss patterns can be selected and determined based on the random display pattern MR3 for determining the variable display pattern.

  In this embodiment, normal, multi-A, multi-B, multi-C, and super variable display patterns are prepared as a plurality of types of variable display patterns to be reach patterns. In addition, normal A and normal B variable display patterns are prepared as a plurality of types of variable display patterns serving as normal loss patterns. As a plurality of types of variable display patterns serving as shortened loss patterns, shortened A and shortened B variable display patterns are prepared.

  Here, when the big hit pattern determination table 200A shown in FIG. 7A is compared with the reach-losing pattern determination table 200B shown in FIG. 7B, the variable display pattern determination for each reach pattern (reach type) is performed. The random number MR3 is assigned differently. That is, the ratio of the reach type selected differs depending on whether the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is lost or a big hit. Thus, the probability that the display result is a big hit will vary depending on the type of reach that appears during the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. As described above, the probability that the display result determined for each reach type is a big hit is also referred to as a reach big hit reliability or simply a reach reliability.

  FIG. 8 (A) shows the case of losing when it is determined that the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is lost for each of the normal, multi-A, multi-B, multi-C and super reach patterns. It is explanatory drawing which shows the selection probability at the time of the big hit when the determination to make a result a big hit was made. Further, FIG. 8B shows a case where the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal gaming state and the probability variation gaming state for each of the normal, multi-A, multi-B, multi-C, and super reach patterns. It is explanatory drawing which shows the reliability of reach. Note that the reach reliability shown in FIG. 8B is that the jackpot probability in the normal gaming state is 1/300, the jackpot probability in the probability variation gaming state is 1/30, and the reach appearance rate at the time of loss is 1/300. It is calculated as being 10. As shown in FIG. 8B, the reach reliability of each reach pattern used in this embodiment is different from each other.

  FIG. 9 shows the reach effect display in the normal variable display pattern among the reach patterns. In the normal variable display pattern, after variable display of decorative symbols is started in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” variable display portions in the first image display device 5A, for example, as shown in FIG. In the “left” and “right” variable display sections such as the decorative pattern “7” as shown, the same decorative pattern stops on the middle effective line, and reach is established. After the reach is thus established, the variation speed of the decorative symbol in the “medium” variable display portion is reduced. And if it is a loss, for example, the decorative pattern stopped and displayed on the active line in the middle row in the “left” and “right” variable display parts such as the decorative pattern “8” as shown in FIG. 9B. Different decorative symbols are stopped and displayed on the middle active line in the “middle” variable display section. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit, for example, a decoration that is stopped and displayed on the active line in the middle in the “left” and “right” variable display portions such as the decoration pattern “7” as shown in FIG. The same decorative design as the design is stopped and displayed on the middle active line in the “middle” variable display section.

  FIG. 10 shows the reach effect display in the multi-A variable display pattern among the reach patterns. In the multi-A variable display pattern, after variable display of decorative symbols is started in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” variable display portions in the first image display device 5A, for example, FIG. In the “left” and “right” variable display portions such as the decorative pattern “7” as shown in FIG. 6, the same decorative design stops on a predetermined effective line such as an effective line in a diagonal direction, and reach is established. After the reach is thus established, the decorative design in each variable display unit is reduced and displayed, for example, in the upper left of the display screen of the first image display device 5A. If the multi-A variable display pattern is the first pattern # 1, for example, as shown in FIG. 10B, the display screen of the first image display device 5A is divided into two parts, Different display images A1 and A2 are reproduced and displayed in each display area. On the other hand, when the multi-A variable display pattern is the second pattern # 2, for example, as shown in FIG. 10C, the display area of the entire display screen of the first image display device 5A is displayed. Thus, the moving image A1 is reproduced and displayed, and the moving image A2 is reproduced and displayed in the entire display area of the second image display device 5B. As described above, in the multi-A variable display pattern, as the reach effect display, two different moving images A1 and A2 are displayed on the display screens of the first image display device 5A and the second image display device 5B. Playback and display in the area.

  Thereafter, in the case of deriving and displaying the final decorative pattern of the lost combination as the variable display result of the decorative design, for example, the variable display of “left” and “right” such as the decorative design “8” as shown in FIG. Stops on the active line where the reach is established in the variable display part of “medium” for the decorative design different from the decorative design that has reached the reach by stopping together on the predetermined active line at the part Let On the other hand, in the case of deriving and displaying the jackpot combination fixed decoration pattern as a variable display result of the decoration pattern, for example, a decorative pattern that is a reach such as a decoration pattern “7” as shown in FIG. The same decorative design is stopped on the effective line where the reach is established in the “middle” variable display section.

  FIG. 11 shows the reach effect display in the multi-B variable display pattern among the reach patterns. In the multi-B variable display pattern, for example, the same decorative pattern stops on a predetermined effective line in the “left” and “right” variable display portions such as the decorative pattern “7” as shown in FIG. Reach is established. After the reach is thus established, the decorative design in each variable display unit is reduced and displayed, for example, in the upper left of the display screen of the first image display device 5A. If the multi-B variable display pattern is the first pattern # 1, for example, as shown in FIG. 11B, the display screen of the first image display device 5A is divided into three parts, Reproduction display of different moving images B1 to B3 is performed in each display area. On the other hand, when the multi-B variable display pattern is the second pattern # 2, for example, as shown in FIG. 11C, the display screen of the first image display device 5A is divided into two, The moving images B1 and B2 that are different from each other are reproduced and displayed in each divided display area, and the moving image B3 is reproduced and displayed in the display area that is the entire display screen of the second image display device 5B. Thus, in the multi-B variable display pattern, as the reach effect display, three different moving images B1 to B3 are displayed on the display screens of the first image display device 5A and the second image display device 5B. Playback and display in the area.

  Thereafter, in the case of deriving and displaying the final combination symbol of the lost combination as the variable symbol display result, the variable display of “left” and “right” such as the ornament symbol “8” as shown in FIG. Stops on the active line where the reach is established in the variable display part of “medium” for the decorative design different from the decorative design that has reached the reach by stopping together on the predetermined active line at the part Let On the other hand, in the case of deriving and displaying the jackpot combination confirmed decorative pattern as a variable display result of the decorative pattern, for example, a decorative pattern that is a reach such as a decorative pattern “7” as shown in FIG. The same decorative design is stopped on the effective line where the reach is established in the “middle” variable display section.

  FIG. 12 shows the reach effect display in the multi-C variable display pattern among the reach patterns. In the multi-C variable display pattern, for example, the same decorative pattern stops on a predetermined effective line in the “left” and “right” variable display portions such as the decorative pattern “7” as shown in FIG. Reach is established. After the reach is thus established, the decorative design in each variable display unit is reduced and displayed, for example, in the upper left of the display screen of the first image display device 5A. When the multi-C variable display pattern is the first pattern # 1, for example, as shown in FIG. 12B, the display screen of the first image display device 5A is divided into four parts, Reproduction display of different moving images C1 to C4 is performed in each display area. On the other hand, when the multi-C variable display pattern is the second pattern # 2, for example, as shown in FIG. 12C, the display screen of the first image display device 5A is divided into three, The moving images C1 to C3 that are different from each other are reproduced and displayed in each divided display area, and the moving image C4 is reproduced and displayed in the display area that is the entire display screen of the second image display device 5B. As described above, in the multi-C variable display pattern, as the reach effect display, four different moving images C1 to C4 are displayed on the display screens of the first image display device 5A and the second image display device 5B. Playback and display in the area.

  Thereafter, in the case of deriving and displaying the final decorative pattern of the lost combination as the variable display result of the decorative pattern, for example, the variable display of “left” and “right” such as the decorative pattern “8” as shown in FIG. Stops on the active line where the reach is established in the variable display part of “medium” for the decorative design different from the decorative design that has reached the reach by stopping together on the predetermined active line at the part Let On the other hand, in the case of deriving and displaying the jackpot combination confirmed decorative pattern as the variable display result of the decorative pattern, for example, a decorative pattern that is a reach such as a decorative pattern “7” as shown in FIG. The same decorative design is stopped on the effective line where the reach is established in the “middle” variable display section.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8B, the multi-B variable display pattern has higher reach reliability than the multi-A variable display pattern, and compared to the multi-B variable display pattern. In order to increase the reach reliability of the multi-C variable display pattern, the random value is determined by the big hit pattern determination table 200A shown in FIG. 7A and the reach lose pattern determination table 200B shown in FIG. Table data (determination data) for associating MR3 with each variable display pattern is configured. As a result, when a reach display with a variable display pattern with a large number of moving images (streams) to be reproduced appears, a reach effect display with a variable display pattern with a small number of moving images appears. Therefore, the probability that the variable display result is a big hit is high.

  In each of the variable display patterns of multi A to multi C, the content of the moving image to be reproduced and displayed may be different depending on whether the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a big hit or lost. . For example, in each of the multi-A to multi-C variable display patterns, an animation image or the like showing a state in which a predetermined game such as a roulette game is executed may be displayed as a moving image reproduction display. When the variable display result is a big hit, an image showing a state where a predetermined purpose has been achieved is displayed, for example, a ball thrown into a rotating roulette enters a place showing a “big hit”. What is necessary is just to alert | report that a variable display result is a big hit. On the other hand, when the variable display result is lost, for example, an image showing that the predetermined purpose is not achieved, for example, the ball thrown into the rotating roulette enters a place indicating “lost”. It is only necessary to display that the variable display result is lost.

  In the RAM 116 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 5, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a variable manner, for example, as shown in FIG. A game control data holding area 210 is provided. The game control data holding area 210 shown in FIG. 13 includes a special figure hold storage unit 161, a game control flag setting unit 162, a game control timer setting unit 163, a game control counter setting unit 164, and a game control buffer setting unit. 165.

  The special figure storage unit 161 displays a special figure game by the special symbol display device 4 and a variable display of the decorative symbols on the first image display device 5A when the game ball wins a start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6. Although the execution condition for executing is satisfied, the hold information regarding the special figure game in which the start condition for starting variable display is not satisfied due to the reason that the previous special figure game or the like is being executed is stored. For example, the special figure holding storage unit 161 associates with the holding numbers in the order of winning in the start winning opening, and for special figure display result determination extracted from the random number circuit 113 or the like by the CPU 114 based on the establishment of the execution condition by the winning. The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for probability variation determination are set as the pending data and stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

  The game control flag setting unit 162 stores data indicating the states of various flags updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 162 is provided with a special symbol process flag, a big hit flag, a probability change confirmation flag, a probability change flag, a demonstration display flag, a main backup flag, and the like.

  The special symbol process flag indicates which process should be selected / executed in the special symbol process (step S15 in FIG. 32, FIG. 33) executed to control the progress of the special symbol game in the special symbol display device 4. Instruct. The jackpot flag is set to the on state in response to the decision that the special symbol or decorative pattern change display result will be a big hit, while the special figure game based on the decision is terminated. Is cleared and turned off. The probability change confirmation flag is set to the ON state in response to the decision that the probability variation big hit is made when the variable symbol display result of special symbols and decorative symbols is a big hit, while the big hit game based on the probability variation big hit Cleared when the state ends and turns off.

  The probability variation flag is set to an on state in response to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being controlled to the probability variation gaming state, while the variable display result of special symbols and decorative symbols is a big hit, In response to the number of executions of the special figure game in the gaming state reaching a predetermined number of times (for example, “100”), the game is cleared and turned off. The demonstration display flag is set to an on state in response to transmission of a demonstration display command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. On the other hand, the demo display flag is cleared and turned off in response to the end of the special figure game or the big hit gaming state when the variable symbol display result of the special symbol or decoration symbol is lost. It becomes a state. The main backup flag indicates whether or not a predetermined memory protection process has been executed by the gaming control microcomputer 100 when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. For example, when “55H” is set as the value of the main backup flag, backup is present (ON state), while when a value other than “55H” is set, backup is not present (OFF state).

  The game control timer setting unit 163 is provided with a special symbol process timer, for example. The special symbol process timer mainly includes a time for controlling the progress of the special symbol game such as a special symbol variable display time which is the execution time of the special symbol game, and a time for controlling the progress of the big hit gaming state. This is for measuring on the substrate 11 side. For example, the special symbol process timer stores the timer value data corresponding to the time measured to control the progress of the special symbol game or the big hit gaming state as a special symbol process timer value, and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. In this case, a timer initial value determined corresponding to the variable display pattern when the special symbol display device 4 starts the special symbol game is set in the special symbol process timer.

  The game control counter setting unit 164 is provided with, for example, a special figure holding memory number counter and a probability variation counter. The special figure holding memory number counter counts the special figure holding memory number which is the number of holding data in the special figure holding memory unit 161 based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning port formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6. belongs to. For example, the special figure reserved memory number counter stores count value data corresponding to the special figure reserved memory number as a special figure reserved memory number count value, and is updated in accordance with the increase or decrease of the special figure reserved memory number (for example, 1 addition) Alternatively, 1 is subtracted).

  The probability variation counter is for counting the remaining number of special figure games that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the probability variation gaming state. In the probability variation number counter, the number of special figure games (for example, “100” predetermined as executable in the probability variation gaming state corresponding to the start of the probability variation gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the probability variation jackpot is established. The initial count data (for example, “64H”) corresponding to “)” is set as the probability variation count value. Then, every time the special game in which the variable display result is lost in the probability variation gaming state ends, the probability variation count value is updated (for example, 1 is subtracted).

  The game control buffer setting unit 165 includes, for example, a display result determination buffer and a main checksum buffer. In the display result determination buffer, the data indicating the random value MR1 and the random value MR2 read from the special figure holding storage unit 161 when the special figure game start condition is satisfied is used as the display result determination buffer value. Set. With this display result determination buffer value, you can determine whether the variable symbol display result for special symbols or decorative symbols is a big hit or lose, and if it is a big hit, whether it is a probable big hit or a normal big hit, etc. enable. The main checksum buffer is for storing a checksum calculated using stored data in a specific area of the RAM 116 when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped.

  The timer circuit 117 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 5 is configured by, for example, four channels (CH0 to CH3) of built-in 8-bit programmable counters, and can generate a real-time interrupt and measure time. is there. For example, the timer circuit 117 starts counting down at a predetermined cycle from a preset count value for each channel, and when there is a channel whose count value is “00”, the interrupt flag corresponding to the channel is turned on. set. At this time, if the interrupt is permitted, the timer circuit 117 generates an interrupt request to the CPU 114.

  The serial communication circuit 118 included in the game control microcomputer 100 is transmitted to and received from a predetermined sub-side control board such as a payout control board in a full duplex, asynchronous, standard NRZ (Non Return to Zero) format, for example. This circuit handles communication data. The input / output port 119 includes an input port for taking in various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100 and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. Has been.

  The effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 3 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the signal relay board 13, and receives the first and Various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by various rendering electrical components such as the second image display devices 5A and 5B, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9, and other accessories are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 performs display operations in the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B, audio output operations from the speakers 8L and 8R, lamp lighting operations and extinguishing operations in the game effect lamp 9, and predetermined roles. It has a function of determining the control content for causing the electrical component for production to execute a predetermined production operation, such as an object drive operation. The effect control board 12 is connected with wiring for transmitting video signals to the first image display device 5A and the second image display device 5B, wiring for transmitting drive signals to the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9, and the like. Yes. The effect control board 12 includes an effect control microcomputer 120, a display control unit 121, a sound control unit 122, and a lamp control unit 123.

  FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the effect control microcomputer 120 and the display control unit 121 mounted on the effect control board 12. In addition to the first image display device 5A and the second image display device 5B, FIG. 14 also shows an LCD drive circuit 125 that drives the second image display device 5B to display an image on the display screen. The LCD drive circuit 125 may be mounted on the effect control board 12 or may be installed outside the effect control board 12.

  The presentation control microcomputer 120 shown in FIG. 14 is configured using, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a CPU 131, a ROM 132, a RAM 133, a random number circuit 134, and an input / output port 135. In the effect control microcomputer 120, the CPU 131 executes a program read from the ROM 132, thereby executing a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electrical component. At this time, the CPU 131 reads the fixed data from the ROM 132, the CPU 131 writes the various data to the RAM 133 and temporarily stores the data, and the CPU 131 stores the various data temporarily stored in the RAM 133. The CPU 131 receives the input of various signals from the outside of the effect control microcomputer 120 via the input / output port 135, and the CPU 131 operates the effect control microcomputer 120 via the input / output port 135. Transmission operations for outputting various signals to the outside are also performed.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 131 outputs a display control command serving as a display control command from the input / output port 135 to the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121 for transmission. In addition, the CPU 131 outputs audio data from the input / output port 135 to the sound control unit 122 for transmission. Further, the CPU 131 outputs lamp data from the input / output port 135 to the lamp control unit 123 for transmission.

  In addition, the CPU 131 can access the temporary storage memory 156 provided in the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121 via the input / output port 135. The display data read from the temporary storage memory 156 is temporarily stored in the RAM 133 and then supplied to the LCD drive circuit 125 from the input / output port 135, and is displayed on the display screen of the second image display device 5 B by the LCD drive circuit 125. Display an image on.

  In the effect control board 12, the random number circuit 134 generates all or a part of various random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side. For example, on the side of the effect control board 12, a random number value for determining a definite decorative symbol, a random number value for determining a reach announcement, a random value for determining a big hit announcement, or the like is used. In addition, in order to enhance the effect, random numbers other than these may be used on the effect control board 12 side. Numerical data indicating each random number value may be counted so that the random number circuit 134 can be updated by hardware, or the CPU 131 can be updated by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 134. It may be counted as follows.

  The random number value for determining the determined decorative symbol is used to determine the decorative symbol that is derived and displayed as the fixed decorative symbol on each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” variable display units in the first image display device 5A. The random value to be used. For example, the random number value for determining the determined decorative design includes a random number value for determining the jackpot symbol / left determined symbol, a random value for determining the middle determined symbol, a random value for determining the right determined symbol, and the like.

  The random value for determining the reach notice determines whether or not to execute a notice effect for notifying that the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes reach, and if it is decided to execute, determines the form of the notice effect It is a random value used for. In this embodiment, the reach notice period determined in advance within the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the stop of the decorative pattern on the “left” and “right” variable display sections. Assume that the reach notice patterns # 1 to # 3 are prepared as reach notice patterns for notifying that there is a possibility that the variable display mode of the decorative symbols may be reach. When any one of the reach notice patterns of reach notice # 1 to # 3 is selected, for example, after the variable display of the decorative symbols is started, the decorative symbols are displayed on the “left” and “right” variable display portions. Preliminary effect display that notifies that there is a possibility that the variable display mode of decorative symbols may reach due to a predetermined display operation during a predetermined reach notice period such as the period until fluctuation is stopped Is executed.

  As a specific example, in response to selection of one of the reach notice patterns of reach notice # 1 to # 3, the second image display device 5B, as shown in FIGS. 15 (A) to 15 (C). Display operation is performed. In the display operation of reach notice # 1 shown in FIG. 15A, the entire display screen of the second image display device 5B is darkened and then the display screen is flashed. In the display operation of reach notice # 2 shown in FIG. 15B, the character information for notifying that the reach is reached is displayed on the display screen of the second image display device 5B. In the display operation of reach notice # 3 shown in FIG. 15C, a predetermined character image is displayed on the display screen of the second image display device 5B. Here, the character image displayed on the display screen of the 2nd image display apparatus 5B should just show a person, an animal, an object other than these, or other arbitrary figures, for example. Note that the notice effect display as the reach notice is not limited to that performed by the display operation in the second image display device 5B, but may be performed by the display operation in the first image display device 5A.

  The random value for determining the jackpot notice determines whether or not to execute a notice effect for notifying that the variable display result of the decorative symbol becomes a confirmed decorative symbol of the jackpot combination. It is a random value used to determine the aspect. In this embodiment, the decisive decoration of the jackpot combination is obtained as a variable display result of the decorative symbol within a predetermined jackpot notice period within the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the time when the fixed decorative symbol is derived and displayed. It is assumed that jackpot notice patterns # 1 to # 3 are provided as jackpot notice patterns for notifying that there is a possibility that the symbol is derived and displayed. When one of the jackpot notice patterns of the jackpot notice # 1 to # 3 is selected, for example, a period from when the decorative display variable display mode reaches reach until the confirmed decoration pattern is derived and displayed, etc. By performing a predetermined display operation during a predetermined jackpot notice period, a notice effect display for notifying that there is a possibility that a definite decorative symbol of the jackpot combination may be derived and displayed as a variable display result of the decorative symbol is executed. .

  As a specific example, the second image display device 5B corresponds to the selection of one of the jackpot notice patterns # 1 to # 3 as shown in FIGS. 16A to 16C. Display operation is performed. In the display operation of jackpot notice # 1 shown in FIG. 16A, an effect image showing a predetermined pattern is displayed on the entire display screen of the second image display device 5B. In the display operation of jackpot notice # 2 shown in FIG. 16B, the reliability of reach in the variable display of decorative symbols performed on the first image display device 5A is notified on the display screen of the second image display device 5B. The character information to be displayed is displayed. By performing the display operation of the jackpot notice # 2, it is possible to provide the player with information related to the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 that is the reliability of reach. In the display operation of jackpot notice # 3 shown in FIG. 16C, a predetermined character image is displayed on the display screen of the second image display device 5B. Here, the character image displayed in the display operation of the jackpot notice # 3 may be an effect image different from the character image displayed in the display operation of the reach notice # 3. The notice effect display that is a big hit notice is not limited to that performed by the display operation in the second image display device 5B, but may be performed by the display operation in the first image display device 5A.

  In the ROM 132 included in the effect control microcomputer 120 shown in FIG. 14, as data for determining the control operation by the CPU 131, for example, a plurality of types of decorative symbol determination tables, a notice determination table, a pre-transfer setting table, an effect control pattern Data constituting a table or the like is stored. The decorative symbol determination table is a table used to determine a fixed decorative symbol derived and displayed as a variable display result of decorative symbols in the first image display device 5A. The notice determination table determines whether or not to perform a notice effect such as a reach notice or a jackpot notice based on a random number value for a notice decision such as a random value for a reach notice decision or a random value for a jackpot notice decision. It is a table used in order to determine the notice pattern etc. which show the aspect of notice effect.

  In the production control microcomputer 120, when variable display of decorative symbols is started, for example, the CPU 131 refers to a notice determination table stored in the ROM 132, determines whether to execute a reach notice or a big hit notice, When the execution is decided, the notice pattern is decided. As an example, the CPU 131 refers to the reach notice determination table stored in the ROM 132 based on the reach notice determination random number extracted from the random number circuit 134 or the like, and determines whether to execute the reach notice, Reach notice pattern is determined when it is decided to execute. Further, the CPU 131 determines whether or not to execute the jackpot notice by referring to the jackpot notice determination table stored in the ROM 132 based on the random number value for determining the jackpot notice extracted from the random number circuit 134 or the like. Then, when the decision is made, the jackpot notice pattern is decided.

  At this time, a different reach notice determination table is referred to in accordance with whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is reach. The reach notice determination table that is referred to when reaching reach and the reach notice determination table that is referred to when not reaching are the results of determining whether to execute reach notice, The assignment of random numbers for reach notice determination to reach notice patterns is different. In this way, the probability that the reach notice is decided to be executed and the selection probability of each reach notice pattern in the case of execution are made different depending on whether or not the decorative display variable display mode is reach. Can do. For example, when the decorative display variable display mode is reach, the table data in the reach notice determination table (for determination) is determined so that the reach notice is determined to be executed with a higher probability than when the reach is not reach. Data). Also, based on the selection probability of each reach notice pattern, the expectation that the variable display mode will reach when the notice effect is performed by each reach notice pattern (that is, the probability that the reach notice is given when the reach notice appears) It is possible to determine the reliability of the reach notice. For example, the reliability of the reach notice pattern by each reach notice pattern is ((selection probability of the reach notice pattern when reaching reach) × (reach appearance rate)) / ((reach notice pattern when not reaching reach). (Selection probability) × (1−reach appearance rate) + (selection probability of the reach notice pattern when reaching reach) × (reach appearance rate)).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the variable display mode of the decorative design is reached so that the number of executions of the variable display that is not the reach is larger than the number of executions of the variable display that is not the reach compared to the variable display mode of the decorative design. (Reach appearance rate) is determined. For example, when the reach appearance rate is 1/10, on average, the variable display that does not become reach is executed nine times, and the variable display that reaches reach is executed once. Designed to. Therefore, the effect image that appears in the reach notice that is executed with a high probability when it is not reach is displayed more frequently than the effect image that appears in the reach notice that is executed with a low probability. Become.

  In addition, the CPU 131 refers to a different jackpot notice determination table corresponding to whether or not the variable symbol display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a jackpot. And, in the jackpot notice determination table that is referred to when the jackpot is won and the jackpot notice table that is referred to when the jackpot is not won, the decision result whether or not the jackpot notice is executed, The allocation of random numbers for determining the jackpot notice for the jackpot notice pattern is different. Thereby, in accordance with whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a big hit, the probability determined to execute the big hit notice and the selection probability of each big hit notice pattern in the case of execution, Can be different. For example, when the variable display result of a special symbol or decorative symbol is a big hit, the table data in the big hit announcement determination table is determined so that it is decided to execute the big hit announcement with a higher probability than when it is not a big hit. (Determination data) is configured. Also, based on the selection probability of each jackpot notice pattern, the expectation that the variable display result will be a jackpot when the notice effect is performed by each jackpot notice pattern (that is, the probability that the jackpot notice appears when the jackpot notice appears) The reliability of the jackpot notice can be determined. For example, the reliability of the jackpot notice pattern by each jackpot notice pattern is ((the probability of selection of the jackpot notice pattern in the case of a jackpot) × (probability of jackpot)) / ((the probability of selection of the jackpot notice pattern in the case of a loss) X (losing probability) + (selection probability of the big hit notice pattern in the case of big hit) x (big hit probability)).

  In the pachinko machine 1, a special display is made so that the number of executions of the variable display in which the display result is lost is sufficiently larger than the number of executions of the variable display in which the display result of the special symbol or the decorative design is a big hit. A probability that a variable display result of a symbol or a decorative symbol is a big hit (hit probability) is determined. For example, when the big hit probability is 1/300, on the average, the variable display that the display result is lost is executed 299 times, and the variable display that the display result is the big hit is executed once. It is designed to be a ratio. Therefore, the effect image that appears in the jackpot notice that is executed with a high probability when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative pattern is lost is compared with the effect image that appears in the jackpot notice that is executed with a low probability. Will be displayed at a high frequency.

  The advance transfer setting table stored in the ROM 132 is a first image display device among image data indicating various effect images such as an image of a decorative pattern or an image to be displayed on the second image display device 5B with a notice effect. The image data indicating the effect image set so that the display frequency in 5A or the second image display device 5B is higher than the required effect image, the effect image is the first image display device 5A or the second image display device. Prior to being displayed on the display screen of 5B, in order to instruct to transfer from the image data memory 142 (FIG. 14) included in the display control unit 121 to the temporary storage memory 156 (FIG. 14) in the VDP 141 in advance. This is the table used. Here, the effect image is an image of a predetermined part (entire or part of the display screen) that can be displayed on the display screen of the first image display device 5A or the second image display device 5B, and image data. Is data prepared for displaying an image of a predetermined part (entire or part of the display screen) on the display screen of the first image display device 5A or the second image display device 5B.

  As a specific example of the advance transfer setting table, the advance transfer setting table 220 as shown in FIG. 17A is used in this embodiment. The advance transfer setting table 220 shown in FIG. 17A is composed of 3N + 1 (N is an arbitrary natural number) table data. The table data read from the advance transfer setting table 220 is determined by the advance transfer count value that is a count value in the advance transfer counter.

  In the advance transfer setting table 220, as table data for specifying image data to be transferred from the image data memory 142 to the temporary storage memory 156 in advance, the number of processes, read addresses # 1 to #N, write address # 1 to #N, transfer data amounts # 1 to #N, and the like are stored. Here, the frequency of use of the image data indicating each effect image displayed on the display screen of the first image display device 5A or the second image display device 5B depends on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal gaming state. Differences occur depending on whether the game is in progress. For example, in the normal gaming state, as shown in FIG. 2A, in order to display the decorative symbol smaller than that in the probability-changing gaming state, the VGA mode ( Image data configured to correspond to the number of pixels of 640 × 480 pixels) is used. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 2B, when the game is in the probability variation gaming state, the image data for displaying the decoration symbol is larger than that in the normal gaming state. Image data configured to correspond to the number of pixels in the SVGA mode (800 × 600 pixels) is used. Here, when using the image data configured corresponding to the number of pixels in the SVGA mode, the enlargement ratio of the effect image displayed on the first image display device 5A is configured corresponding to the number of pixels in the VGA mode. The enlargement ratio is set to be smaller than when using the processed image data. Therefore, if the image data configured to correspond to the number of pixels in the SVGA mode is used, a finer effect image can be displayed compared to the case where image data configured to correspond to the number of pixels in the VGA mode is used. Therefore, even when a large effect image is displayed, the roughness of the image quality can be made inconspicuous.

  In such a setting, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the normal gaming state, even if the image data indicating the decorative design corresponding to the SVGA mode is stored in the temporary storage memory 156, the opportunity to use this image data As a result, the use efficiency of the temporary storage memory 156 decreases. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17B, advance transfer setting tables 220A and 220B corresponding to the normal gaming state and the probability variation gaming state are prepared in advance, and the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is prepared. The image data indicating the effect image that is set so that the display frequency is higher than the required effect image is transferred from the image data memory 142 to the temporary storage memory 156 in advance.

  As a specific example of the effect control pattern table, an effect control pattern table 230A as shown in FIG. 18 is used in this embodiment. In the effect control pattern table 230A, data indicating a display control command transmitted to the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121, audio data output to the sound control unit 122, and a lamp output to the lamp control unit 123 A plurality of types of data indicating the contents of various effects control, such as data, are stored as effect control patterns. The plurality of types of effect control patterns stored in the effect control pattern table 230A are, for example, as shown in FIG. 19, effect control process timer setting values, effect control process timer determination values # 1 to #n (n is an arbitrary natural number) ), Display control data # 1 to #n, audio control data # 1 to #n, lamp control data # 1 to #n, and various types of data for controlling the production operation. The contents of various effect controls such as control commands transmitted to the VDP 141, the sound control unit 122, and the lamp control unit 123 of the unit 121, the timing of switching the effect control, and the like are set. In the effect control pattern table 230A shown in FIG. 18, in response to the variable display pattern indicated by the variable display start command from the main board 11, the decorative display is derived and displayed after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. A plurality of types of effect control patterns used for effect control in the above are stored.

  As another example of the effect control pattern table, an effect control pattern table 230B as shown in FIG. 20 is also used in this embodiment. Also in this effect control pattern table 230B, a plurality of types of data indicating the contents of various effect controls are stored as effect control patterns. In the effect control pattern table 230B shown in FIG. 20, for example, a demonstration screen display, an effect display in each round of the jackpot gaming state, an ending effect display for notifying the end of the jackpot gaming state, a period other than during the variable display of the decorative symbols A plurality of types of effect control patterns used for effect control are stored.

  For example, the demonstration display effect control pattern stored in the effect control pattern table 230B is an effect control pattern used for effect control during execution of the demonstration screen display. In this demonstration screen display, for example, demonstration screens # 1 to # 3 as shown in FIGS. 21A to 21C correspond to the elapsed time from the reception timing of the demonstration display command transmitted from the main board 11. The images may be displayed sequentially on the entire display screen of the second image display device 5B. Here, the demo screen # 1 shown in FIG. 21A displays character information indicating the model name of the pachinko gaming machine 1 on the display screen of the second image display device 5B. The demo screen # 2 shown in FIG. 21 (B) is a screen in which character information relating to a game such as a jackpot probability in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed on the display screen of the second image display device 5B. Demo screen # 3 shown in FIG. 21 (C) displays a character image corresponding to the motif of the pachinko gaming machine 1 on the display screen of the second image display device 5B. By displaying such demonstration screens # 1 to # 3 on the second image display device 5B, it is possible to provide the player with information related to the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The RAM 133 provided in the effect control microcomputer 120 shown in FIG. 14 is provided with an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the RAM 133 may have an area for holding various data as an effect control flag setting unit, an effect control timer setting unit, an effect control counter setting unit, an effect control buffer setting unit, and the like.

  The effect control flag setting unit is set or cleared according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the first image display device 5A and the second image display device 5B, or the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, for example. Data for setting a plurality of types of flags to be set is stored. The effect control timer setting unit stores data indicating a plurality of types of timer values used for effect control such as display control on the first image display device 5A and the second image display device 5B, for example. The effect control counter setting unit stores data indicating a plurality of types of count values used for effect control such as display control on the first image display device 5A and the second image display device 5B, for example. The circuit used for flag setting and counter / timer may be constituted by a register circuit provided separately from the RAM 133. The effect control buffer setting unit can temporarily store various data used for effect control such as data included in the effect control command received by the effect control board 12 and data generated in the process of the CPU 131. Provide multiple types of buffers.

  The input / output port 135 included in the effect control microcomputer 120 is an input port for taking in various signals transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 120 and to transmit various signals to the outside of the effect control microcomputer 120. Output port. For example, from the output port of the input / output port 135, a display control command transmitted to the display control unit 121, audio data transmitted to the sound control unit 122, lamp data transmitted to the lamp control unit 123, Display data transmitted to the LCD drive circuit 125 is output. Also, display data read from the temporary storage memory 156 of the VDP 141 is input to the input port of the input / output port 135.

  The display control unit 121 shown in FIG. 14 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor) 141 and an image data memory 142. The VDP 141 has, for example, an image data processing function such as a high-speed drawing function and a moving image decoding function for displaying an effect image on the display screen of the first image display device 5A or the second image display device 5B. The image processor executes image data processing in accordance with a display control command from the computer 120. The image data memory 142 is configured using a non-volatile recording medium such as a semiconductor memory such as a flash memory, a magnetic memory, or an optical memory, for example, and displays an effect image on the first image display device 5A or the second image display device 5B. Various image data used for this purpose are stored. For example, the image data stored in the image data memory 142 includes a plurality of types of image data corresponding to a plurality of types of effect images, such as a plurality of types of decorative symbols variably displayed on the first image display device 5A. Yes.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the VDP 141 includes a host interface 151, a transfer control circuit 152, an image data memory interface 153, a moving image decoder 154, a drawing circuit 155, a temporary storage memory 156, and a frame buffer memory 157. And a display circuit 158.

  The host interface 151 includes an address input terminal and a data input / output terminal for exchanging various data with the production control microcomputer 120. The transfer control circuit 152 operates to transfer the image data read from the image data memory 142 to the temporary storage memory 156 based on a display control command from the effect control microcomputer 120 or the display for reading from the frame buffer memory 157. A data transfer operation between the VDP 141 and an external circuit or inside the VDP 141, such as an operation of transferring data to the temporary storage memory 156, is controlled. For example, the transfer control circuit 152 uses DMA (Direct Memory Access) transfer to transfer data from the image data memory 142 to the temporary storage memory 156 and data from the temporary storage memory 156 to the RAM 133 of the effect control microcomputer 120. What is necessary is just to provide the DMA apparatus for performing transfer.

  The image data memory interface 153 includes an address bus connection terminal for reading image data stored in the image data memory 142, a data bus connection terminal, a chip selection signal output terminal, and the like. The moving picture decoder 154 reads out the moving picture data stored in the picture data memory 142 in a state where the data is compressed by, for example, motion compensation predictive coding, and executes predetermined decompression processing. Perform decoding. Here, the moving picture decoder 154 can decode the moving picture data frame by frame in response to a display control command from the effect control microcomputer 120.

  The drawing circuit 155 executes drawing processing for creating display data for displaying the effect image on the first image display device 5A or the second image display device 5B based on the image data stored in the temporary storage memory 156. To do. For example, the drawing circuit 155 writes and stores the image data read from the read address of the temporary storage memory 156 in the write address of the frame buffer memory 157 in response to the display control command from the effect control microcomputer 120. Thus, display data for displaying a predetermined effect image at predetermined coordinates on the display screen of the first image display device 5A or the second image display device 5B is created.

  The temporary storage memory 156 is configured using, for example, a VRAM (Video RAM) or the like, and temporarily stores the image data read from the image data memory 142. In this embodiment, the storage data in the temporary storage memory 156 can be read directly from the effect control microcomputer 120. FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating an example of an address map in the temporary storage memory 156. As shown in FIG. 22, the temporary storage memory 156 includes a fixed address area 156A and a variable address area 156B.

  The fixed address area 156A is a decorative pattern or character image displayed on the display screen of the first image display device 5A, a background image, a character image or character image displayed on the display screen of the second image display device 5B, or the like. This is an area for temporarily storing image data registered in the advance transfer setting table 220 as image data corresponding to the effect image set so as to increase the display frequency among a plurality of types of effect images. For example, the image data corresponding to the VGA mode indicating the decorative pattern variably displayed in the normal gaming state is displayed on the first image display device 5A at least once in the period in which the variable display is executed each time in the normal gaming state. Used for variable display. On the other hand, the image data corresponding to the character image displayed in the jackpot notice that predicts that the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative design will be a big hit is the jackpot notice pattern corresponding to the start of the variable display. Only when the decision to execute the notice effect is made, it is used for displaying on the second image display device 5B or the like within a predetermined period during which the variable display is executed. That is, the effect image that becomes the decorative design is set so that the display frequency in the first image display device 5A and the second image display device 5B is higher than the effect image for the big hit notice. In addition, among the effect images such as the character image and the character image for the notice effect, the effect image used for the notice effect with the low reliability of the reach notice and the low reliability of the jackpot notice has a higher degree of reliability. The display frequency in the first image display device 5A and the second image display device 5B is set to be higher than that of the effect image used in FIG.

  The variable address area 156B is preliminarily used as image data corresponding to an effect image that is displayed less frequently in the first image display device 5A and the second image display device 5B than the effect image in which the image data is stored in the fixed address area 156A. The transfer setting table 220 is an area for temporarily storing image data that is not registered. The variable address area 156B can temporarily store various data that is not stored in the fixed address area 156A, such as moving image data decoded by the moving image decoder 154, for example. The start address STADD and the final address ENADD of the variable address area 156B are notified to the VDP 141 by a display control command from the effect control microcomputer 120 and set.

  The frame buffer memory 157 provided in the VDP 141 shown in FIG. 14 is configured by using, for example, a separate VRAM that is physically separated from the temporary storage memory 156 and the like. Display data is expanded and stored. The display data expanded and stored in the frame buffer memory 157 may be pixel data (raster data) created by the drawing circuit 155 based on vector data (vector data) such as points, lines, and polygons, for example. In this embodiment, the data stored in the frame buffer memory 157 cannot be directly read from the effect control microcomputer 120. In the frame buffer memory 157, display data for the effect image displayed on the first image display device 5A and display data for the effect image displayed on the second image display device 5B are written by the drawing circuit 155. Is remembered. Then, the display data of the effect image displayed on the first image display device 5A is read by the display circuit 158. On the other hand, the display data of the effect image displayed on the second image display device 5B is transferred to the variable address area 156B of the temporary storage memory 156, temporarily stored, and then read out by the effect control microcomputer 120. It is transmitted to the RAM 133.

  FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating an example of an address map in the frame buffer memory 157. As shown in FIG. 23, the frame buffer memory 157 is provided with a first display data area 157A and a second display data area 157B. The first display data area 157A is an area for storing display data for effect images displayed on the first image display device 5A. The second display data area 157B is an area for storing display data for effect images displayed on the second image display device 5B. In the frame buffer memory 157, for example, the area from the start address 0000000H to the address VGEND is the size of the VGA mode based on the image data corresponding to the VGA mode, for example, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal gaming state. When display data having (640 × 480 pixels) is created, it is used as the first display data area 157A. Further, the area from the start address 0000000H to the address SVEND in the frame buffer memory 157 is the size of the SVGA mode based on the image data corresponding to the SVGA mode, for example, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the probability variation gaming state. When display data having (800 × 600) is created, it is used as the first display data area 157A. An area from the address SESTA to the address SEEND in the frame buffer memory 157 is used as the second display data area 157B.

  The display circuit 158 reads display data from the first display data area 157A in the frame buffer memory 157, generates gradation data of each pixel constituting the display screen of the first image display device 5A, and has a predetermined clock. This circuit generates a scanning signal based on the signal and outputs it to the first image display device 5A, thereby displaying an effect image on the display screen of the first image display device 5A. The display circuit 158 has a scaler circuit that converts the number of pixels of display data read from the frame buffer memory 157 and generates gradation data of each pixel constituting the display screen of the first image display device 5A. Yes. Display data read from the frame buffer memory 157 is input to the scaler circuit, and the pixel is enlarged (or reduced) at a predetermined enlargement ratio in one or both of the vertical direction and the horizontal direction. Convert the number of pixels of data. For example, the scaler circuit can convert the number of pixels of the pixel data by using bilinear filtering that obtains the pixel values after enlargement from the four pixel values before enlargement by linear interpolation. The vertical and horizontal enlargement ratios in the scaler circuit can be individually set by a display control command from the effect control microcomputer 120, for example.

  In addition, the VDP 141 has a table for managing the image data read from the image data memory 142 and temporarily stored in the fixed address area 156A or the variable address area 156B of the temporary storage memory 156, for example, as shown in FIG. Such an index table 250 is provided. The index table 250 illustrated in FIG. 24 includes table data in which data indicating “start address”, “horizontal size”, “reading completion flag”, and the like is associated with data indicating “index number”, for example. . Here, “start address” indicates the head address of the image data stored in the image data memory 142. The “horizontal size” indicates the size in the horizontal direction of the effect image indicated by the image data. The “reading completion flag” indicates “ON” when the transfer of the image data read from the image data memory 142 to the temporary storage memory 156 is completed, and when the transfer is not completed or is read from the variable address area 156B. When the writing to the frame buffer memory 157 is completed, “off” is indicated.

  FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of a plurality of types of display control commands that the CPU 131 transmits from the input / output port 135 to the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121 in the effect control microcomputer 120. As shown in FIG. 25, in this embodiment, storage area setting command, advance transfer command, automatic transfer command, fixed address designation transfer command, display data transfer command, probability change start display setting command, probability change end display setting Display control commands such as a command, a multi-view setting command, a moving image display setting command, a moving image decoding command, and an enlarged display setting command are transmitted from the effect control microcomputer 120 to the VDP 141. These display control commands are composed of data indicating the classification of commands and data indicating the types of commands, as with the effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. But you can. Alternatively, control data corresponding to each display control command may be written by the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 into various registers provided in the VDP 141 via the input / output port 135. For example, an address bus and a data bus having a predetermined bus width are connected between the input / output port 135 of the effect control microcomputer 120 and the host interface 151 of the VDP 141. Addresses are assigned to various registers included in the VDP 141, and the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 designates and accesses the registers of the VDP 141 by an address signal output from the input / output port 135 to the address bus. If you can.

  The storage area setting command indicates setting of a storage area in the temporary storage memory 156. For example, the storage area setting command includes data for notifying the VDP 141 of the start address STADD of the variable address area 156B, the final address ENADD of the variable address area 156B, and the like.

  The pre-transfer command is set so that the display frequency in the first image display device 5A and the second image display device 5B is higher than the required effect image among the image data stored in the image data memory 142. The image data indicating the effect image is transferred to the fixed address area 156A of the temporary storage memory 156 and expanded and stored in advance. For example, the advance transfer instruction includes data for notifying the VDP 141 of the read position of the image data in the image data memory 142 and the image size after being expanded and stored in the fixed address area 156A. Here, the reading position of the image data in the image data memory 142 may be a reading address in the image data memory 142, or specific information (for example, image data) attached to the effect image corresponding to the image data to be read. It may be specified using arbitrary information such as the character number of the character image corresponding to.

  The automatic transfer command is based on the automatic transfer setting in the VDP 141 for image data stored in the image data memory 142 that has not been transferred to the fixed address area 156A of the temporary storage memory 156 in advance. This is written in the frame buffer memory 157 to indicate that the effect image indicated by the image data is displayed on the display screen of the first image display device 5A or the second image display device 5B. For example, the automatic transfer command sends the image data read position in the image data memory 142, the image data write position in the frame buffer memory 157, the data amount of the image data read and transferred from the image data memory 142, etc. to the VDP 141. Contains data for notification. Here, the writing position of the image data in the frame buffer memory 157 may be a one-dimensional writing address in the frame buffer memory 157. For example, the display on the first image display device 5A or the second image display device 5B is possible. It may be specified using arbitrary information such as a two-dimensional address corresponding to the arrangement of the effect image on the screen (for example, the display coordinates of the upper left portion of the effect image).

  The fixed address designation transfer command causes the image data previously transferred from the image data memory 142 to the fixed address area 156A of the temporary storage memory 156 to be written in the frame buffer memory 157, and an effect image corresponding to the image data is written. It is possible to display on the display screen of the first image display device 5A or the second image display device 5B. For example, the fixed address designation transfer command indicates the image data read position in the fixed address area 156A, the image data write position in the frame buffer memory 157, the data amount of image data read and transferred from the fixed address area 156A, and the like. Data for notifying the VDP 141 is included. Here, the reading position of the image data in the fixed address area 156A may be a reading address in the temporary storage memory 156, or an arbitrary index number associated with the image data in the index table 250 shown in FIG. It may be specified using the information.

  The display data transfer command indicates that the display data stored in the frame buffer memory 157 is transferred to the temporary storage memory 156 for writing. For example, the display data transfer command includes a display data reading position in the frame buffer memory 157, a display data writing position in the temporary storage memory 156, and a data amount of display data read out and transferred from the frame buffer memory 157. The data for notifying the VDP 141 is included. Here, the display data write position in the temporary storage memory 156 designated by the display data transfer command may be any write address included in the variable address area 156B of the temporary storage memory 156, for example. Alternatively, in the display data transfer command, the display data write position in the temporary storage memory 156 is not designated, and the VDP 141 side refers to, for example, the index table 250 to the variable address area 156B of the temporary storage memory 156. Alternatively, an empty area other than an area where valid image data and display data are stored may be specified, and display data may be written and stored in the specified empty area. In this case, the display data writing position in the variable address area 156B may be specified from the production control microcomputer 120 side by setting the index table 250 or the like.

  The probability change start display setting command indicates the setting of the display operation corresponding to the case where the control to the probability variation gaming state is started in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the probability change start display setting command is generated from the display data having the size of the SVGA mode stored in the first display data area 157A of the frame buffer memory 157 when the probability change gaming state is set, and the first image display device 5A. The data including the setting of the enlargement ratio in the scaler circuit provided in the display circuit 158 is included so that conversion into pixel data having the size of the XGA mode corresponding to the total number of pixels on the display screen of the display screen 158 is possible. Further, the probability setting start display setting command is data indicating that the bus width of the data bus connected between the VDP 141 and the image data memory 142 is set to 64 bits predetermined as the first bus width. Contains. In addition, the probability change start display setting command sets the chip select setting for selecting the chip to be read out of the memory chips 142-1 to 142-3 (FIG. 31) included in the image data memory 142 as CS #. Data indicating zero is included.

  The probability variation end display setting command indicates the setting of the display operation corresponding to the case where the control to the probability variation gaming state is terminated in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the probability change end display setting command is generated from the display data having the size of the VGA mode stored in the first display data area 157A of the frame buffer memory 157 in the normal gaming state, from the first image display device 5A. The data including the setting of the enlargement ratio in the scaler circuit provided in the display circuit 158 is included so that conversion into pixel data having the size of the XGA mode corresponding to the total number of pixels on the display screen of the display screen 158 is possible. The probability change end display setting command is data indicating that the bus width of the data bus connected between the VDP 141 and the image data memory 142 is set to 64 bits predetermined as the first bus width. Contains. In addition, the probability change end display setting command sets the chip select setting for selecting a chip to be read out of the memory chips 142-1 to 142-3 (FIG. 31) included in the image data memory 142 as CS #. Data indicating zero is included.

  The multi-view setting command indicates setting of a display area for reproducing and displaying a plurality of moving images on the display screen of the first image display device 5A or the second image display device 5B. For example, the multi-view setting command is generated from the display data having the size of the VGA mode stored in the first display data area 157A of the frame buffer memory 157 when the moving image is reproduced and displayed. The data including the setting of the enlargement ratio in the scaler circuit provided in the display circuit 158 is included so that conversion into pixel data having the size of the XGA mode corresponding to the total number of pixels on the display screen of the display screen 158 is possible. The multi-view setting command includes data indicating that the bus width of the data bus connected between the VDP 141 and the image data memory 142 is set to 32 bits predetermined as the second bus width. Yes. In addition, the multi-view setting command sets a chip select setting for selecting a chip to be read out of the memory chips 142-1 to 142-3 (FIG. 31) included in the image data memory 142 as CS # 1. Contains data that indicates what to do.

  The moving image display setting command indicates settings relating to individual moving images that are reproduced and displayed on the display screens of the first image display device 5A and the second image display device 5B. For example, the moving image display setting command indicates the setting of the index table 250 corresponding to an individual moving image, such as an index number or an image size (horizontal size, etc.) assigned to the individual moving image in the index table 250. Contains data. The moving image display setting command includes data for notifying the VDP 141 of the moving image data reading position in the image data memory 142, the moving image data writing position in the temporary storage memory 156, and the like.

  The moving image decoding command indicates that moving image data for one frame is decoded by the moving image decoder 154. For example, the moving image decoding command includes data indicating identification information of a moving image to be decoded, such as an index number assigned to each moving image in the index table 250. The moving image decoding command includes data for instructing execution of decoding.

  The enlarged display setting command indicates a setting for enlarging and displaying a predetermined effect image on the display screen of the first image display device 5A or the second image display device 5B. For example, the enlarged display setting command is generated from the display data having the size of the SVGA mode stored in the first display data area 157A of the frame buffer memory 157 when performing the enlarged display of the effect image. The data including the setting of the enlargement ratio in the scaler circuit provided in the display circuit 158 is included so that conversion into pixel data having the size of the XGA mode corresponding to the total number of pixels on the display screen of the display screen 158 is possible. The enlarged display setting command includes data indicating that the bus width of the data bus connected between the VDP 141 and the image data memory 142 is set to 64 bits predetermined as the first bus width. Yes. In addition, the enlarged display setting command sets the chip select setting for selecting a chip to be read out of the memory chips 142-1 to 142-3 (FIG. 31) included in the image data memory 142 as CS # 0. Contains data that indicates what to do.

  FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an address map in the image data memory 142 of the display control unit 121 shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 26, the image data memory 142 includes a main sprite image data area 142A, a sub sprite image data area 142B, a main moving image data area 142C, and a sub moving image data area 142D. . The main sprite image data area 142A stores sprite image data used for displaying a sprite image (still image) on the display screen of the first image display device 5A. The sub sprite image data area 142B stores sprite image data used for displaying a sprite image on the display screen of the second image display device 5B. The main moving image data area 142C stores moving image data used for reproducing and displaying a moving image on the display screen of the first image display device 5A. The sub moving image data area 142D stores moving image data used for reproducing and displaying a moving image on the display screen of the second image display device 5B. The image data used for displaying an image on the display screen of the first image display device 5A and the image data used for displaying an image on the display screen of the second image display device 5B are common to each other. The main sprite image data area 142A and the sub sprite image data area 142B, or the main moving image data area 142C and the sub moving image data area 142B are integrally arranged without being separated. Also good.

  In this embodiment, an area from the address MASTA to the address MAEND in the image data memory 142 is set in the main sprite image data area 142A. An area from the address SASTA to the address SAEND in the image data memory 142 is set in the sub-sprite image data area 142B. An area from the address MBSTA to the address MBEND in the image data memory 142 is set in the main moving image data area 142C. An area from the address SBSTA to the address SBEND in the image data memory 142 is set in the sub moving image data area 142D.

  The moving image data stored in the main moving image data area 142C and the sub moving image data area 142D is data-compressed by motion compensation predictive coding and has a predetermined stream configuration. In the main moving image data area 142C and the sub moving image data area 142D, a plurality of types of moving image data are respectively displayed in display areas provided on the display screens of the first image display device 5A and the second image display device 5B, for example. Each of the types of game effects produced by individual moving images reproduced and displayed is stored in one moving image file. Each moving image file includes a file header, at least one frame header, and compressed data for each frame. For example, compressed data for one frame is classified as either an I picture, a P picture, or a B picture, and information for identifying the type of any picture and the display order of each picture are specified in the frame header. Information to be included. An I picture is a picture that has been encoded by intraframe encoding. The P picture is a picture that performs forward motion compensation prediction using only past frames. A B picture is a picture that performs bi-directional motion compensation prediction using both past and future frames. In addition, without performing motion compensation predictive coding, moving image data that has been subjected to only intra-frame compression (spatial compression) may be used such that all the compressed data for one frame is an I picture. .

  In the main sprite image data area 142A, for example, as shown in FIG. 27, image data # 01-01 to # 01-XX for displaying sprite images corresponding to the SVGA mode, and for displaying sprite images corresponding to the VGA mode are displayed. Image data # 02-01 to # 02-XX are stored.

  In the sub-sprite image data area 142B, for example, as shown in FIG. 28, for effect display corresponding to demo screens # 1 to #X including demo screens # 1 to # 3 shown in FIGS. Image data # 11-01 to # 11-XX are stored. Further, in the sub-sprite image data area 142B, effect display image data # 12- corresponding to reach notices # 1 to #X including reach notices # 1 to # 3 shown in FIGS. 01 to # 12-XX are stored. In addition, in the sub-sprite image data area 142B, effect display image data # 13 corresponding to jackpot notices # 1 to #X including jackpot notices # 1 to # 3 shown in FIGS. -01 to # 13-XX are stored.

  In the main moving image data area 142C, for example, as shown in FIG. 29, the number of display areas set for reproduction display of moving images on the display screen of the first image display device 5A or the second image display device 5B. It corresponds to the type of moving image, whether the variable display pattern of multi-A to multi-C that displays and displays a moving image as a reach effect display is the first pattern # 1 or the second pattern # 2. A plurality of types of image data # 21-01 to # 21-XX for moving image display prepared in advance are stored. Here, all of the moving image display image data # 21-01 to # 21-XX stored in the main moving image data area 142C may be configured according to the number of pixels in the VGA mode. . Alternatively, all or part of the image data # 21-01 to # 21-XX may be configured corresponding to the number of pixels in the SVGA mode. Among the image data # 21-01 to # 21-XX, image data for reproducing and displaying a high-definition moving image such as a live-action image is configured corresponding to the number of pixels in the SVGA mode. Image data for reproducing and displaying a low-definition moving image other than an image or the like may be configured corresponding to the number of pixels in the VGA mode. Here, for example, when reproducing and displaying a moving image using moving image data having a large number of pixels, such as the SVGA mode of the VGA mode and the SVGA mode, moving image data having a small number of pixels is used. Compared with the case where playback display is performed, the image quality of the moving image to be played back can be improved, and the effect of reproduction by moving image playback display can be enhanced.

  In the sub moving image data area 142D, for example, as shown in FIG. 30, the number of display areas set for reproduction display of moving images on the display screen of the first image display device 5A or the second image display device 5B. In addition, a plurality of types of moving image display prepared in advance corresponding to the fact that the variable display pattern of multi-A to multi-C that performs reproduction display of the moving image as the reach effect display is the second pattern. Image data # 31-01 to # 31-XX are stored.

  Further, the image data memory 142 includes a plurality of (three in the example of FIG. 31) memory chips 142-1 to 142-3 as shown in FIG. 31, for example. In the example shown in FIG. 31, image data for sprite image display is stored in the memory chip 142-1 and the memory chip 142-2. That is, the main sprite image data area 142A and the sub sprite image data area 142B are arranged in the storage areas of the memory chip 142-1 and the memory chip 142-2. The image data for sprite image display stored in the memory chip 142-1 and the memory chip 142-2 is read in units of 64 bits predetermined as the first bus width. For example, in the main sprite image data area 142A and the sub sprite image data area 142B, addresses are given in 64-bit units, and upper 32 bits of data are stored in the memory chip 142-1, while lower 32 bits of data are stored. Data is stored in the memory chip 142-2. Data stored in the memory chip 142-1 and the memory chip 142-2 can be read when the chip select signal CS # 0 output from the VDP 141 is on. The chip select signal CS # 0 is turned on in response to, for example, setting the chip select to CS # 0 by a display control command transmitted from the effect control microcomputer 120 to the VDP 141. When the chip select signal CS # 0 is in the on state, a data signal corresponding to the read data from the memory chip 142-1 is transmitted to the image data memory interface 153 via the data buses # 0 to # 31. Data signals corresponding to the read data from the memory chip 142-2 are transmitted to the image data memory interface 153 via the data buses # 32 to # 63.

  The memory chip 142-3 shown in FIG. 31 stores image data for moving image display. That is, the main moving image data area 142C and the sub moving image data area 142D are arranged in the storage area of the memory chip 142-3. The moving image display image data stored in the memory chip 142-3 is read in units of 32 bits determined in advance as the second bus width. For example, in the main moving image data area 142C and the sub moving image data area 142D, addresses are assigned in units of 32 bits, and all data is stored in the memory chip 142-3. Data stored in the memory chip 142-3 can be read when the chip select signal CS # 1 output from the VDP 141 is in an ON state. The chip select signal CS # 1 is turned on in response to the setting of the chip select being CS # 1 by a display control command transmitted from the production control microcomputer 120 to the VDP 141, for example. When the chip select signal CS # 1 is on, a data signal corresponding to read data from the memory chip 142-3 is transmitted to the image data memory interface 153 via the data buses # 0 to # 31. . At this time, the data buses # 32 to # 63 are not used.

  The sound control unit 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 3 generates a sound signal by performing digital / analog conversion on the sound data received from the effect control microcomputer 120, for example, and the speakers 8L and 8R. This is a circuit for outputting sound by supplying to. The lamp control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 generates, for example, a lamp drive signal corresponding to the lamp data received from the effect control microcomputer 120, and the game effect lamp 9, various decorative lamps, LEDs, etc. It is a circuit which performs lighting / light extinction switching by supplying to an electrical decoration member. Note that the sound control unit 122 and the lamp control unit 123 may be circuits installed outside the effect control board 12.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 114 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When this game control main process is started, for example, the CPU 114 sets the interrupt mode after the interrupt is disabled, and the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) of the game control microcomputer 100 and the built-in device output. An interrupt mode of a maskable interrupt in which an interrupt address is generated is set by combining the interrupt vector (1 byte: the least significant bit is “0”). With this setting, when a maskable interrupt occurs, the game control microcomputer 100 is automatically disabled and the contents of the program counter are saved in the stack.

  Subsequently, settings relating to the stack pointer, such as setting of a stack pointer designation address, and setting (initialization) of an internal device register in the game control microcomputer 100 are performed. Thereafter, the RAM 116 is set to be accessible in response to, for example, that a power-off signal transmitted from a power supply board or the like is in an off state. Further, the CPU 114 determines whether or not a clear signal for initializing the storage contents of the RAM 116 is turned on. The clear signal may be a signal transmitted from the predetermined clear switch to the main board 11 via the power supply board, for example. Further, after checking whether or not the clear signal is on, the start timing of the game control process for controlling the progress of the game may be delayed until a predetermined time elapses due to execution of the software. In addition, the CPU 114 may confirm the state of the clear signal only once, but may confirm the state of the clear signal a plurality of times. For example, once it is confirmed that the state of the clear signal is off, the state of the clear signal is confirmed once again after a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 second) has elapsed. At this time, if the clear signal is off, it is determined that the clear signal is off. On the other hand, if the state of the clear signal is on at this time, the state of the clear signal may be confirmed again after a predetermined time has elapsed. Note that the number of times of reconfirming the state of the clear signal may be one time or may be a plurality of times. Further, it is possible to check twice and check again when the check results do not match.

  As a result of such confirmation, when the clear signal is OFF, the data in the RAM 116 is checked to determine whether or not the check result is normal. For example, a checksum is calculated using data stored in a specific area of the RAM 116, and the calculated checksum is compared with a checksum stored in a main checksum buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 165. Here, the main checksum buffer stores a checksum calculated by the same processing when the power supply was stopped last time. This main checksum buffer is included in the backup area of the RAM 116 backed up by the backup power source, and the contents of the main checksum buffer are stored for a predetermined period even when the power supply is stopped. If the comparison result between the calculated checksum and the checksum stored in the main checksum buffer does not match, the data in the specific area of the RAM 116 is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. Is determined to be not normal.

  When the result of the data check is normal, it is determined whether or not the main backup flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 162 is on. The state of the main backup flag is set in the game control flag setting unit 162 when the power supply is stopped. The main backup flag setting location is backed up by the backup power source, so that the state of the main backup flag is saved even when the power supply is stopped. For example, if “55H” is set in the game control flag setting unit 162 as the value of the main backup flag, it is determined that there is a backup (ON state). On the other hand, if a value other than “55H” is set, it is determined that there is no backup (OFF state). Whether the main backup flag is on is determined before determining the data check result, and whether the data check result of the RAM 116 is normal when the main backup flag is on. You may make it determine.

  When the main backup flag is on, after the main backup flag is cleared and turned off, the CPU 114 recovers to return the internal state of the game control microcomputer 100 to the state when the power supply is stopped. Set the hour. As a specific example, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 115 is set as a pointer, and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area in the RAM 116. Here, the work area of the RAM 116 is backed up by a backup power source, and initialization data for an area that may be initialized among the work areas may be set in the backup time setting table. At this time, for example, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 162 is on. If the probability variation flag is on, the effect control board 12 is notified of the probability variation gaming state. An effect control command (for example, the same command as the probability change start command) is transmitted, and the fact that the probability change gaming state is present when the power supply is stopped is notified from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side. May be notified.

  When the clear signal is on, the result of the data check is not normal, or the main backup flag is off, the RAM 116 is initialized. At this time, setting at the time of initialization for setting the internal state of the game control microcomputer 100 to an initial state is also performed.

  After setting one of the setting at the time of restoration and the setting at the time of initialization, for example, by setting the register of the timer circuit 117 provided in the game control microcomputer 100, a predetermined time (for example, 2 mm) is set. The game control microcomputer 100 is internally set so that a timer interrupt is generated every second). Thereafter, based on predetermined random number initial setting data (KRSS) read from the ROM 115 by the CPU 114, a random number initial setting process for initial setting of a random number generation operation by the random number circuit 113 or the like is executed. After that, serial communication initial setting processing for initial setting of serial communication operation by the serial communication circuit 118, interrupt initial setting processing for setting priorities of various interrupt processing executed based on interrupt requests, etc. are executed. It only has to be done. Then, the CPU 114 sets the interrupt permitted state and waits for the occurrence of various interrupts.

  If an interrupt does not occur after setting the interrupt enabled state, or after the interrupt processing corresponding to the interrupt cause is executed, it is determined whether the power-off signal has been turned on (whether it has been output). If it is off, it waits for the occurrence of various interrupts. When the power-off signal is turned on, the main-side power-off process is executed, and then a predetermined loop process is executed to wait until the operation of the game control microcomputer 100 is stopped by stopping the power supply.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 114 each time a timer interrupt for controlling the progress of the game is generated in the game control microcomputer 100. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 32 is started, the CPU 114 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby changing the state of the detection signal input from each of the switches 21 to 23 through the switch circuit 101. Determination is made (step S11). Subsequently, by executing predetermined error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and if necessary, warning can be generated according to the diagnosis result (step S12). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (step) S13).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a main random number value update process for updating a part of the random number values MR1 to MR4 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S14). Thereafter, the CPU 114 executes special symbol process processing (step S15). In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 162 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the display operation control or special in the special symbol display device 4 is performed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to set the special winning opening / closing operation in the variable winning ball apparatus 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S16). The CPU 114 executes the normal symbol process process to control the display operation (for example, lighting and extinguishing of the LED) of the normal symbol display device 20 to change the normal symbol variable display (for example, lighting and blinking) and the like. Setting of tilt control of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6 is enabled. After executing the normal symbol process, the CPU 114 transmits a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 by executing a command control process (step S17). After executing the command control process in this way, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S15 shown in FIG. 32 as special symbol process processing. When the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 33 is started, the CPU 114 first checks whether or not the detection signal from the start port switch 22 is turned on, for example, so that the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6 forms a start. It is determined whether or not a game ball has won a winning opening (step S101). When the game ball wins the start winning opening and the detection signal from the start opening switch 22 is turned on (step S101; Yes), the start winning process is executed (step S102). After the start winning process is executed, for example, the head address of the reserved memory number notification command table corresponding to the special figure reserved memory number count value which is a count value in the special figure reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 164 Is set to a transmission command pointer provided in the RAM 116 as a work area, for example, to make a setting for transmitting the pending storage number notification command to the effect control board 12 (step S103). When the setting in step S103 is performed, the command control process in step S17 shown in FIG. 32 is executed after the special symbol process process is finished, so that the main board 11 performs the effect control board 12. A pending storage number notification command is transmitted. When the detection signal from the start port switch 22 is OFF in step S101 (step S101; No), the processing of steps S102 and S103 is skipped.

  In the start winning process executed in step S102, first, the special figure reservation storage number, which is the number of numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination stored in the special figure storage part 161, It is determined whether or not a predetermined upper limit value (eg, “4”) is reached. At this time, if the special figure holding storage number is an upper limit value, the start detection by the current winning is invalidated and the start winning process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the special figure pending storage number is less than the upper limit value, for example, the stored value in the random value register of the random number circuit 113 is read as the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. For example, the CPU 114 sets the output control signal transmitted to the random number circuit 113 to the ON state, and then reads the random value output signal transmitted from the random number circuit 113 to read out the random number value register included in the random number circuit 113. The obtained numerical data may be acquired as the random value MR1. Similarly, numerical data indicating a random number value MR2 for probability variation determination is read. In this way, after reading the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the probability variation, the random number values MR1 and MR2 are set at the head of the empty entry in the special figure holding storage unit 161. At this time, for example, by adding 1 to the special figure reservation storage number count value, the special figure reservation storage number in the special figure reservation storage unit 161 is added and updated.

  After executing the process of step S103 or after determining that the detection signal from the start port switch 22 is in the OFF state in step S101, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 162 In response to this, the CPU 114 executes steps S110 to S117 as shown in FIG.

  The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In the special symbol normal process, whether or not to start the special symbol game by the special symbol display device 4 based on the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result stored in the special symbol storage unit 161. The process etc. which determine are included. The variable display pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “1”. This variable display pattern setting process includes a process for determining a variable display pattern for special symbols and decorative patterns, a process for determining a variable display time corresponding to the variable display pattern, and the like.

  The special symbol variable display process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In the special symbol variable display process, the control for changing the special symbol by performing the lighting / extinguishing control of each segment constituting the special symbol display device 4 is performed. In the special symbol variable display process, the remaining time of the variable display in the special symbol game by the special symbol display device 4 is a special symbol process timer value which is a timer value in the special symbol process timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 163. And a process of stopping and displaying the confirmed special symbol in response to the passage of the variable display time in the special figure game. The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. This special symbol stop process is a process for performing a setting for transmitting a jackpot start command in response to the end of the special symbol game by the special symbol display device 4, and a certain variation count that is a count value in the certain variation counter. Includes processing to update values.

  The pre-opening process for the special winning opening in step S114 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “4”. This pre-opening process for the big winning opening is a process for setting an opening time for making the big winning opening open when the special winning ball forming device 7 formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened as a round in the big hit gaming state. Or a process of waiting until a predetermined waiting time elapses before the special winning opening is opened, and a drive signal for making the special winning opening open after the waiting time elapses. The process for making it supply with respect to 82 is included. The special winning opening opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “5”. This process during opening of the big prize opening is a process of measuring the remaining time for which the big prize opening is in the open state for each round executed in the big hit gaming state by the special symbol process timer value, or from the open state of the big prize opening. In order to make it a closed state, the process which stops supply of the drive signal with respect to the solenoid 82 from the solenoid circuit 102 etc. is included. The special winning opening opening post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “6”. This process after opening the big prize opening is a process for determining whether or not the number of rounds executed by setting the big prize opening to the open state has reached a predetermined maximum number of opening times (for example, “15”), It includes a process for setting to send a big hit end command when the maximum value is reached. The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “7”. In the jackpot ending process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a stage action for informing the end of the jackpot gaming state is performed by the electrical components for the stage such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 elapses. And a process for performing various settings corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol normal process executed in step S110 of FIG. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 34, the CPU 114 first reads the special figure reserved memory number count value held in the game control counter setting unit 164, and the special figure reserved memory number is “0”. Whether or not (step 201).

  In step S201, when the special figure hold storage number is other than “0” (step S201; No), the special figure display result stored in correspondence with the hold number “1” from the special figure hold storage unit 161. Data indicating the random number value MR1 for determination and data indicating the random value MR2 for probability variation determination are read (step S202). The data read at this time may be set in, for example, a display result determination buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 165.

  When the process of step S202 is executed, the special figure reserved memory number is updated by subtracting 1 from the special figure reserved memory number count value, for example (step S203). Furthermore, in the process of step S203, the random number values MR1 and MR2 stored in the entries lower than the holding number “1” (for example, entries corresponding to the holding numbers “2” to “4”) in the special figure holding storage unit 161 are stored. The data shown is shifted up by one entry.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S203, for example, it is determined whether or not the data indicating the random number MR1 read from the display result determination buffer matches the predetermined jackpot determination value data, thereby variably displaying special symbols and decorative symbols. It is determined whether or not the result is a big hit (step S204). Here, the jackpot determination value data is data indicating a value in a predetermined range of the random value MR1 corresponding to whether the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 162 is on or off. If it is. As a specific example, when the probability variation flag is OFF, the value in the range of “2001” to “2218” in the random value MR1 matches the jackpot determination value data. On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is on, the value in the range of “2001” to “3308” in the random value MR1 matches the big hit determination value data. Note that the jackpot determination value data may be determined by table data of a jackpot determination table stored in advance in the ROM 115.

  If the random value MR1 matches the big hit determination value data in step S204 (step S204; Yes), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 162 is set to the on state (step S205). Subsequently, for example, by determining whether or not the data indicating the random number MR2 read from the display result determination buffer matches the predetermined probability variation determination value data, the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is made a big hit. In this case, a determination is made as to whether it is a normal big hit or a probability variation big hit (step S206).

  If the random value MR2 matches the probability variation determination value data in step S206 (step S206; Yes), the probability variation confirmation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 162 is set to the on state (step S207). At this time, the probability variation big hit symbol “7” is determined as the confirmed special symbol (step S208). On the other hand, if the random value MR2 does not match the probability variation determination value data in step S206 (step S206; No), the normal jackpot symbol “3” is determined as the confirmed special symbol (step S209). If the random value MR1 does not match the big hit determination value data in step S204 (step S204; No), the lost symbol “-” is determined as the confirmed special symbol (step S210). After executing any of the processes of steps S208, S209, and S210, the special symbol process flag value is set to “1” corresponding to the variable display pattern setting process (step S211), and then the special symbol is set. Normal processing ends.

  If the special figure hold storage number is “0” in step S201 (step S201; Yes), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 162 is on (step S201). S212). At this time, if the demo display flag is on (step S212; Yes), the special symbol normal process is terminated.

  If the demonstration display flag is OFF in step S212 (step S212; No), for example, by setting the start address of the demonstration display command table to the transmission command pointer provided in the RAM 116 as a work area, etc. Settings for transmitting the demonstration display command to the effect control board 12 are performed (step S213). When the setting in step S213 is performed, the command control process in step S17 shown in FIG. 32 is executed after the special symbol process process is completed, so that the main board 11 performs the effect control board 12. A demo display command will be sent. Thereafter, the demo display flag is set to the on state (step S214), and the special symbol normal process is terminated.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display pattern setting process executed in step S111 of FIG. In the variable display pattern setting process shown in FIG. 35, the CPU 114 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S221). At this time, if the big hit flag is on (step S221; Yes), the big hit pattern determination table 200A shown in FIG. 7A is set as a table for determining the variable display pattern (step S222). As a specific example, in the process of step S222, the CPU 114 sets the top address of the big hit pattern determination table 200A stored in the ROM 115 to a table pointer provided in the RAM 116 as a work area.

  When the big hit flag is off in step S221 (step S221; No), for example, a numerical value indicating the reach determination random number MR4 updated by hardware such as the random number circuit 113 or by software executed by the CPU 114. Data is extracted (step S223). Then, it is determined whether or not the random number value MR4 extracted in step S223 matches predetermined reach determination value data (step S224). Here, the reach determination value data may be determined by table data constituting a reach determination table stored in advance in the ROM 115 or the like. As a specific example, a value in the range of “210” to “239” in the random value MR4 matches the reach determination value data.

  When the random number MR4 matches the reach determination value data in step S224 (step S224; Yes), the reach / loss pattern determination table 200B shown in FIG. 7B is used as a table for determining the variable display pattern. Setting is made (step S225). As a specific example, the CPU 114 sets the start address of the reach / losing pattern determination table 200B stored in the ROM 115 to the table pointer in the process of step S225.

  If the random number MR4 does not match the reach determination value data in step S224 (step S224; No), it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is on (step S226). At this time, if the probability variation flag is off (step S226; No), the normal-time loss pattern determination table 200C shown in FIG. 7C is set as a table for determining the variable display pattern (step S227). At this time, for example, the head address of the normal-time loss pattern determination table 200C stored in the ROM 115 may be set in the table pointer.

  If the probability variation flag is ON in step S226 (step S226; Yes), the probability variation losing pattern determination table 200D shown in FIG. 7D is set as a table for determining the variable display pattern (step S226). S228). At this time, for example, the head address of the probability variation losing pattern determination table 200D stored in the ROM 115 may be set in the table pointer.

  After executing any of the processes of steps S222, S225, S227, and S228, the random value MR3 for variable display pattern determination that is updated by hardware such as the random number circuit 113 or software executed by the CPU 114 is shown. Numerical data is extracted (step S229). Then, based on the random value MR3 extracted in step S229, by referring to any of the pattern determination tables 200A to 200D set in any of the processes of steps S222, S225, S227, and S228, the random value MR3 A corresponding variable display pattern is determined (step S230).

  After determining the variable display pattern in this way, the variable display time corresponding to the variable display pattern or the like is determined (step S231). At this time, not only the variable display pattern, but also, for example, the special figure holding memory number specified by reading the special figure holding memory number count value, the fixed special symbol (for example, the normal big hit symbol “3” or the probability variable big hit symbol “ 7 ”) or the like, the variable display time may be determined. In the process of step S231, a timer initial value corresponding to the determined variable display time may be set in the special symbol process timer.

  Then, the setting for transmitting the variable display start command to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S232). As a specific example, in the process of step S232, the CPU 114 starts the command table corresponding to the confirmed special symbol, the variable display pattern, the variable display time, etc. among the plural types of variable display start command tables stored in the ROM 115. Set the address to the send command pointer. Here, in the process of step S232, the EXT data of the variable display start command differs depending on whether the confirmed special symbol is the normal big hit symbol “3” or the probable variable big hit symbol “7”. A command table may be selected. Alternatively, in the process of step S 232, different variable display patterns can be selected depending on whether the confirmed special symbol is the normal jackpot symbol “3” or the probable variation jackpot symbol “7”. A command table corresponding to the variable display pattern selected in step S222 may be set. That is, in the process of step S232, a setting for transmitting a variable display start command that differs depending on whether the variable symbol display result of the special symbol is a normal big hit or a probable big hit is made. When the setting in step S232 is performed, the command control process in step S17 shown in FIG. 32 is executed after the special symbol process process is finished, so that the main board 11 performs the effect control board 12. A variable display start command is transmitted. At this time, the setting for transmitting the reserved storage number notification command to the effect control board 12 is also made (step S233). For example, in the variable display start command table set in step S232, in addition to the control data for transmitting the variable display start command to the effect control board 12, a reserved memory count notification command is sent to the effect control board 12. It is only necessary that control data for transmission is included. Then, every time the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 32 is executed after the special symbol process process is completed, a variable display start command, a pending storage number notification command is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. May be transmitted sequentially.

  After executing the process of step S233, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “2” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variable display process (step S234), and then the variable display pattern setting process is ended.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop process executed in step S113 of FIG. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 36, the CPU 114 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S241). At this time, if the big hit flag is on (step S241; Yes), the big hit start time effect waiting time is set (step S242). For example, in the process of step S242, the CPU 114 sets a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the big hit start production waiting time in the special symbol process timer.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S242, setting for transmitting a big hit start command is performed (step S243). For example, in the process of step S243, the CPU 114 sets the head address of the jackpot start command table stored in the ROM 115 to the transmission command pointer. When the setting in step S243 is performed, the command control process in step S17 shown in FIG. 32 is executed after the special symbol process process is completed, so that the main board 11 performs the effect control board 12. A jackpot start command is sent. After executing the process of step S243, the big hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S244).

  Following the process of step S244, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is on (step S245). At this time, if the probability variation flag is on (step S245; Yes), the probability variation flag is cleared and turned off (step S246), the probability variation counter is cleared, and the probability variation count that is the count value in the probability variation counter is counted. The value is set to “0” which is an initial setting value (step S247). At this time, the probability change end confirmation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 162 is set to the on state (step S248).

  When the probability variation flag is off in step S245 (step S245; No), after executing the process of step S248, the value of the special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for the big prize opening “4”. "" (Step S249), the special symbol stop process is terminated.

  When the big hit flag is off in step S241 (step S241; No), it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is on (step S250). At this time, if the probability variation flag is on (step S250; Yes), the probability variation count value is decremented by 1 and updated (step S251). Then, it is determined whether or not the probability variation count value after the update in step S251 is “0” (step S252).

  If it is determined in step S252 that the probability variation count value is “0” (step S252; Yes), for example, the head address of the probability variation end command table stored in the ROM 115 is set in the transmission command pointer. Thus, the setting for transmitting the probability change end command to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S253). When the setting in step S253 is performed, the command control process in step S17 shown in FIG. 32 is executed after the special symbol process process is completed, so that the main board 11 performs the effect control board 12. Probability end command is sent. After the process of step S253 is executed, the probability variation flag is cleared and turned off (step S254).

  When the probability variation flag is OFF in step S250 (step S250; No), when the probability variation count value is a value other than “0” in step S252 (step S252; No), or the processing of step S254 is performed. After the execution, the demo display flag is cleared and turned off (step S255), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “0” (step S256), and the special symbol stop process is terminated.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit end process executed in step S117 of FIG. In the jackpot end process shown in FIG. 37, the CPU 114 first determines whether or not a predetermined jackpot end time effect waiting time has elapsed (step S261). Here, the effect waiting time at the end of the big hit is the special symbol process timer when the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “7” in the post-opening process of the big prize opening executed in step S116 of FIG. What is necessary is just to measure based on the set timer initial value. For example, the CPU 114 updates the timer value in the special symbol process timer by 1 in the process of step S261 and updates the updated timer value with predetermined waiting time elapsed determination value data (for example, data indicating “0”). ) And the like, it may be determined whether or not the effect waiting time at the end of the big hit has elapsed. If the big hit end presentation waiting time has not elapsed in step S261 (step S261; No), the big hit end processing is ended as it is.

  When the big hit end production waiting time has elapsed in step S261 (step S261; Yes), it is determined whether or not the probability variation confirmation flag is on (step S262). At this time, if the probability variation confirmation flag is on (step S262; Yes), the probability variation flag is set to an on state (step S263), and the probability variation confirmation flag is cleared to an off state (step S264). Further, a predetermined initial count value (for example, “100”) is set in the probability variation counter (step S265). Then, for example, by setting the head address of the probability variation start command table stored in the ROM 115 to the transmission command pointer, setting for transmitting the probability variation start command to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S266). When the setting in step S266 is performed, the command control process in step S17 shown in FIG. 32 is executed after the special symbol process process is completed, so that the main board 11 performs the effect control board 12. A probability change start command is sent. After executing the process of step S266, it is determined whether or not the probability variation end confirmation flag is on (step S267).

  If the probability change confirmation flag is off in step S262 (step S262; No), it is determined whether the probability change end confirmation flag is on (step S268). At this time, if the probability change end confirmation flag is ON (step S268; Yes), for example, the head address of the probability change end command table stored in the ROM 115 is set in the transmission command pointer, and the effect control board 12 is thus instructed. Settings for transmitting the probability change end command are performed (step S269). When the setting in step S268 is performed, the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 32 is executed after the special symbol process process is completed, so that the main board 11 performs the effect control board 12. Probability end command is sent.

  When the probability variation end confirmation flag is on in step S267 (step S267; Yes), after executing the process of step S269, the probability variation end confirmation flag is cleared and turned off (step S270). If the probability change end confirmation flag is off in step S267 (step S267; No), if the probability change end confirmation flag is off in step S268 (step S268; No), or after executing the processing of step S270. After updating the value of the special symbol process flag to “0” (step S271), the big hit end processing is ended.

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board, the effect control microcomputer 120 is activated, and the CPU 131 executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 38 is started, the CPU 131 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S51), clears the RAM 133, sets various initial values, and is mounted on the effect control board 12. Register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) (not shown) is performed. Subsequently, the CPU 131 executes a storage area setting command process to set the storage areas in the temporary storage memory 156 included in the VDP 141 to the fixed address area 156A and the variable address area 156B as shown in FIG. A command is issued (step S52).

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the storage area setting command process executed in step S52 of FIG. In this storage area setting command processing, the CPU 131 reads out the STADD setting data and the ENADD setting data from the ROM 132 as data for setting a storage area to be the variable address area 156B as shown in FIG. Steps S131 and S132). Then, based on the setting data read in steps S131 and S132, a storage area setting command is created and transmitted to the VDP 141 provided in the display control unit 121 (step S133). For example, in the process of step S133, the CPU 131 sets control data corresponding to the storage area setting command in the output port for display control command transmission to the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121 among the output ports included in the input / output port 135. To do. As a result, the CPU 131 transmits a storage area setting command from the input / output port 135 to the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121. The storage area setting command transmitted from the input / output port 135 of the effect control microcomputer 120 is fetched by the host interface 151 of the VDP 141.

  After executing the storage area setting command processing as described above, the first image display device 5A and the second image are stored in the storage area to be the fixed address area 156A of the temporary storage memory 156 by executing the advance transfer command processing. A command for temporarily storing image data corresponding to the effect image set so that the display frequency on display device 5B is higher than the required effect image is issued (step S53 in FIG. 38).

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the advance transfer command process executed in step S53 of FIG. In this advance transfer command process, the CPU 131 first determines whether or not a probability change start flag provided in, for example, the effect control flag setting unit of the RAM 133 is on (step S141). At this time, if the probability change start flag is off (step S141; No), the advance state for the normal gaming state shown in FIG. 17B corresponds to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being the normal gaming state. The transfer setting table 220A is set (step S142). As a specific example, the CPU 131 sets the leading address of the pre-transfer setting table 220A stored in the ROM 132 to the pre-transfer pointer provided in the RAM 133 as a work area in the process of step S142.

  If the probability change start flag is ON in step S141 (step S141; Yes), the probability change game state shown in FIG. 17B corresponds to the fact that the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the probability change game state. The advance transfer setting table 220B is set (step S143). As a specific example, the CPU 131 sets the leading address of the advance transfer setting table 220B stored in the ROM 132 in the advance transfer pointer in the process of step S143. After executing the process of step S143, the probability variation start flag is cleared and turned off (step S144).

  Note that when the advance transfer command process is executed in step S53 shown in FIG. 38, a predetermined effect control command (as an example, the same command as the probability change start command) is received from the main board 11 in the process of step S141. For example, it may be determined whether or not the fact that the game is in the probabilistic gaming state when the power supply is stopped is determined. When it is notified that the game state is the probability change game state, the process proceeds to step S143 to set the advance transfer setting table 220B for the probability change game state, while the notification that the state is the probability change game state is received. If not, the process proceeds to step S142 to set the advance transfer setting table 220A for the normal gaming state.

  After executing one of the processes of steps S142 and S144, the advance transfer counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit of the RAM 133 is cleared, and the advance transfer count value as the count value is initialized to “0”. (Step S145). A table corresponding to the pre-transfer count value being “0” from the pre-transfer setting table 220 (the pre-transfer setting tables 220A and 220B having the head address set in the pre-transfer pointer, the same applies hereinafter). The number of processes is set by reading the data (step S146).

  Thereafter, the CPU 131 updates the advance transfer count value, for example, by adding 1 (step S147). Then, by reading the table data of the advance transfer setting table 220 corresponding to the advance transfer count value updated in step S147, a read address indicating the read position of the image data in the image data memory 142 is specified (step S148). Further, the CPU 131 updates the advance transfer count value, for example, by adding 1 (step S149), and reads the table data of the advance transfer setting table 220 corresponding to the updated count value, thereby temporarily storing the memory 156. The write address indicating the write position where the image data is temporarily stored is specified in the storage area to be the fixed address area 156A (step S150).

  Further, the CPU 131 updates the advance transfer count value, for example, by adding 1 (step S151), and reads the table data of the advance transfer setting table 220 corresponding to the updated count value, thereby reducing the transfer data amount. Specify (step S152). Based on the read address, write address, and transfer data amount thus specified, the CPU 131 creates a pre-transfer command and transmits it to the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121 from the input / output port 135 (step S153). Here, in the advance transfer setting tables 220A and 220B shown in FIG. 17B, the effect images are displayed in different display modes depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal gaming state or the probability variation gaming state. Table data corresponding to a plurality of types of image data to be displayed is included. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the process of step S153, the advance transfer command corresponding to the image data for displaying the effect image can be sequentially transmitted to the VDP 141. In response to the advance transfer command, the display control unit 121 sequentially reads out a plurality of types of image data for displaying the effect image in different display modes from the image data memory 142, and the temporary storage memory 156 provided in the VDP 141. The fixed address area 156A is temporarily stored. When the process of step S153 is executed, the number of processes is updated by, for example, subtracting 1 (step S154).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the number of processes updated in step S154 has reached a predetermined end determination value (eg, “0”) (step S155). At this time, if the number of processes does not reach the end determination value (step S155; No), the process returns to step S147. On the other hand, if the number of processes reaches the end determination value (step S155; Yes), the advance transfer counter is cleared and the count value is initialized to “0” (step S156). At this time, the advance transfer pointer may be cleared and the pointer value may be initialized. After that, the variable display number counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit of the RAM 133 is initialized, and the variable display number count value that is the count value is initialized to “0” (step S157), and then the pre-transfer command process is performed. Exit.

  As described above, after the pre-transfer command process is executed in step S53 of FIG. 38, the timer interrupt flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit of the RAM 133 is monitored and whether or not the flag is turned on. Is determined (step S54). If no timer interrupt is generated and the timer interrupt flag is off (step S54; No), a loop process is executed until a timer interrupt occurs, and the process waits. On the other hand, when the timer interrupt flag is turned on due to the occurrence of the timer interrupt (step S54; Yes), the flag is cleared and turned off (step S55), and then the effect control transmitted from the main board 11 is performed. Command analysis processing for analyzing the command is executed (step S56).

  FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of processing contents executed in the command analysis processing in step S56 of FIG. In the command analysis process in step S56, first, the reception command buffer is checked to determine whether or not an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. When it is determined that there is a received command, the command is read from the received command buffer. Subsequently, various processes corresponding to the read reception command are executed.

  For example, when the received command is a variable display start command, the lower byte of the received command is saved by storing it in a variable display start buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit of the RAM 133. At this time, the variable display start flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit of the RAM 133 is set to the on state. When the received command is a demonstration display command, the demonstration display setting flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit of the RAM 133 is set to the on state. When the received command is a big hit start command, the big hit start flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit of the RAM 133 is set to the on state.

  In the command analysis process, when the received command is a big hit round number notification command, the number of rounds is saved by storing the lower byte of the received command in a round number buffer provided in the RAM 133, for example. At this time, the round number notified flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit of the RAM 133 is set to the on state. When the received command is a big hit end command, the big hit end flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit of the RAM 133 is set to the on state. When the received command is a probability change start command, the probability change start flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit of the RAM 133 is set to the on state. When the received command is a probability change end command, the probability change end flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit of the RAM 133 is set to the on state.

  In the command analysis process, when the received command is a pending storage count notification command, a predetermined pending storage count display setting process is executed. In this reserved memory number display setting process, for example, the special figure reserved memory number notified by the reserved memory number notification command is specified, and the first image display device 5A includes the setting corresponding to the specified special figure reserved memory number. In the special symbol start memory display area, the number of special symbol hold memories is displayed. When the received command is another command, for example, a process corresponding to the received command is executed such as setting a command reception flag corresponding to the effect control command received by the effect control flag setting unit of the RAM 133 to the on state.

  As described above, after executing the command analysis process in step S56 of FIG. 38, the decorative symbol process process is executed (step S57). In the decorative symbol process, the display output of the first image display device 5A and the second image display device 5B, the speaker, and the like according to the progress of variable display of decorative symbols performed on the display screen of the first image display device 5A. Settings for executing various performance operations are performed by sound output from 8L and 8R, lighting operation of the game effect lamp 9, and the like. Then, by performing the effect side random number value update process (step S58), various random number values counted by the random number circuit 134 or the like on the effect control board 12 side are updated. After performing the production-side random value update process in step S58, the process returns to step S54.

  In addition, in the effect control microcomputer 120, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal is generated, the CPU 131 automatically sets the interrupt prohibited state. It is preferable to issue (DI command).

  In response to the interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on, the CPU 131 executes a predetermined command reception interrupt process, for example. In this command reception interrupt process, a predetermined input for receiving a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the signal relay board 13 among the input ports included in the input / output port 135 provided in the production control microcomputer 120. A control signal as an effect control command is taken from the port. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, an effect side reception command buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit of the RAM 133. As an example, when the production control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the production side reception command buffer. Thereafter, the CPU 131 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol process executed in step S57 of FIG. In the decorative symbol process process shown in FIG. 42, for example, the following processes of steps S170 to S175 are executed in accordance with the value of the decorative symbol process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit of the RAM 133.

  The variable display start command reception waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the decorative symbol process flag is “0”. This variable display start command reception waiting process is a process for determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols on the first image display device 5A based on whether or not a variable display start command from the main board 11 has been received. Etc.

  The decorative symbol variable display setting process of step S171 is executed when the value of the decorative symbol process flag is “1”. This decorative symbol variable display setting process includes variable symbol display in the first image display device 5A in response to the start of variable symbol special display in the special symbol game by the special symbol display device 4. Various effect images are displayed on the second image display device 5B in the period from the start of the display operation of the effect image in the first image display device 5A and the variable display of the decoration symbol to the display of the definite decoration symbol. In order to perform various effect operations such as display operations, for example, variable display patterns and display result types from among a plurality of types of effect control patterns stored in the effect control pattern table 230A as shown in FIG. Includes processing to select the corresponding one.

  The decorative symbol variable display processing in step S172 is executed when the value of the decorative symbol process flag is “2”. In this processing, the CPU 131 corresponds to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit of the RAM 133, and displays control data, audio control data, lamp control from the effect control pattern as shown in FIG. Read production control data such as data. In accordance with the effect control data read at this time, for example, a display control command is transmitted to the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121, various processes according to the data transferred from the VDP 141 are performed, and a sound is transmitted to the sound control unit 122. Various effects control during variable display of decorative symbols, such as transmitting a control command and transmitting a lamp control command to the lamp control unit 123, is performed. Then, when an end code corresponding to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the big hit start command reception waiting time is set in the effect control process timer. Thereafter, the value of the decorative symbol process flag is updated to “3” which is a value corresponding to the big hit start waiting process.

  The big hit start waiting process in step S173 is executed when the value of the decorative symbol process flag is “3”. In this process, the CPU 131 determines whether or not the jackpot start command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. When the big hit start command is received, the value of the decorative symbol process flag is updated to “4” corresponding to the big hit effect processing based on the determination that the variable display result of the decorative symbol is big hit. To do. On the other hand, when the effect control process timer times out without receiving the jackpot start command from the main board 11, the decorative symbol process flag is determined based on the determination that the variable symbol display result is lost. Is updated to “0” which is an initial value.

  The big hit effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the decorative symbol process flag is “4”. In this processing, for example, the CPU 131 controls the display operation in the first image display device 5A or the second image display device 5B to display an image according to the big hit gaming state, or controls the sound output operation in the speakers 8L and 8R. In the jackpot gaming state, for example, the sound corresponding to the jackpot gaming state is output, or the lighting / turning off operation in the gaming effect lamp 9 is controlled to perform the lighting / turning off / flashing operation according to the jackpot gaming state. Various production control is performed. Then, in response to the fact that the round game executed in the big hit game state has reached the end of the final round (for example, the fifteenth round), the big hit end command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received, etc. The value of the process flag is updated to “5” which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process.

  The ending effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the decorative symbol process flag is “5”. In this ending effect process, for example, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the first image display device 5A or the second image display device 5B, sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or the game effect lamp 9 is turned on. By this, the process which controls the production | presentation operation | movement for alert | reporting completion | finish of jackpot game state is included.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start command reception waiting processing executed in step S170 of FIG. In this variable display start command reception waiting process, the CPU 131 first determines whether or not the probability change start flag is on (step S501). At this time, if the probability change start flag is on (step S501; Yes), display setting for probability change start corresponding to the case where control to the probability change game state is started is performed (step S502). For example, in the probability variation gaming state, as shown in FIG. 2B, one decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” variable display portions in the first image display device 5A. Thus, only one effective line is defined in the horizontal direction, and the decorative symbols on each variable display portion are displayed larger than in the normal gaming state. Therefore, the CPU 131 creates a probability change start display setting command as shown in FIG. In accordance with this probability change start display setting command, the VDP 141 adjusts the enlargement ratio in the scaler circuit of the display circuit 158, and from the display data having the size of the SVGA mode (800 × 600 pixels), the first image display device 5A The enlargement ratio is set so that conversion to pixel data having an XGA mode size (1024 × 768 pixels) corresponding to the total number of pixels on the display screen is possible.

  If the probability change start flag is off in step S501 (step S501; No), it is determined whether or not the probability change end flag is on (step S503). At this time, if the probability variation end flag is on (step S503; Yes), the probability variation end flag is cleared and turned off (step S504). Then, display setting for probability variation end corresponding to the case where the probability variation gaming state ends and the control to the normal gaming state is started is performed (step S505). For example, in the normal game state, as shown in FIG. 2A, three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed on each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” variable display portions in the first image display device 5A. 5 effective lines are determined, and the decorative symbols in each variable display portion are displayed smaller than in the probability variation gaming state. In view of this, the CPU 131 creates a probability change end display setting command as shown in FIG. 25 in the process of step S505, and transmits it to the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121 from the input / output port 135. In accordance with the display setting command for end of probability change, the VDP 141 adjusts the enlargement ratio in the scaler circuit of the display circuit 158, and from the display data having the size of the VGA mode (640 × 480 pixels), the first image display device 5A The enlargement ratio is set so that conversion to pixel data having an XGA mode size (1024 × 768 pixels) corresponding to the total number of pixels on the display screen is possible.

  After executing one of the processes in steps S502 and S505, a pre-transfer command process is executed in the same manner as in step S53 in FIG. 38 (step S506). After executing the advance transfer command process in step S506 or when the probability variation end flag is off in step S503 (step S503; No), it is determined whether or not the variable display start flag is on (step S503: No). Step S507).

  If the variable display start flag is off in step S507 (step S507; No), it is determined whether the demonstration display flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit of the RAM 133 is on (step S508). ). The demonstration display flag is set to an on state when a process of step S512 described later is executed, and is cleared to an off state when the process of step S521 is executed. If the demonstration display flag is off in step S508 (step S508; No), it is determined whether the demonstration display setting flag is on (step S509). At this time, if the demonstration display setting flag is off (step S509; No), the variable display start command reception waiting process is terminated.

  When the demonstration display setting flag is ON in step S509 (step S509; Yes), for example, for demonstration display from among a plurality of types of effect control patterns stored in the effect control pattern table 230B shown in FIG. An effect control pattern is selected and set as an effect control pattern for controlling the effect operation during the demonstration screen display (step S510). As a specific example, the CPU 131 sets the start address of the demonstration display effect control pattern stored in the ROM 132 to the effect control pattern pointer provided in the RAM 133 as a work area in the process of step S510. At this time, the demonstration display setting flag is cleared and turned off (step S511), while the demonstration display flag is set to on (step S512). Thereafter, for example, the production control process timer setting value is read from the start address of the demonstration display production control pattern set in step S510 and the timer initial value in the production control process timer is set (step S513).

  If the demonstration display flag is on in step S508 (step S508; Yes), the effect control process timer value, which is the timer value in the effect control process timer, is updated by subtracting, for example, 1 (step S514). ). At this time, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the timer determination values by comparing the updated effect control process timer value with the effect control process timer determination value shown in the demonstration display effect control pattern. (Step S515). If it does not match any of the timer determination values (step S515; No), the variable display start command reception waiting process is terminated.

  If it matches the timer determination value in step S515 (step S515; Yes), the display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, etc. stored in the demonstration display effect control pattern in association with the timer determination value, etc. Various control data are read (step S516). At this time, it is determined whether or not the control data read in step S516 is an end code (step S517). If the read control data is an end code (step S517; Yes), the process proceeds to step S513, and based on the effect control process timer setting value stored in the demonstration display effect control pattern, The timer initial value in the effect control process timer may be set again. On the other hand, if it is not an end code in step S517 (step S517; No), a command or process corresponding to the control data read in step S516 is performed (step S518), and then a variable display start command is received. The waiting process is terminated.

  If the variable display start flag is on in step S507 (step S507; Yes), it is determined whether the demonstration display flag is on (step S519). At this time, if the demonstration display flag is on (step S519; Yes), for example, display of the demonstration screen such as temporarily erasing the display on each display screen of the first image display device 5A and the second image display device 5B is performed. Settings for termination are performed (step S520). Further, when displaying the demo screen in response to the demonstration display setting flag being turned on in step S509, for example, each of “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the first image display device 5A is displayed. Information that can specify a display image before starting the display of the demo screen, such as data indicating decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the variable display unit, is stored in the information buffer before the demo display provided in the RAM 133. In the process of step S520, based on the information stored in the pre-demo display information buffer, it is preferable to display the image before starting the display of the demo screen and then start the variable display of the decorative symbols. Subsequent to the processing in step S520, the demo display flag is cleared and turned off (step S521). After executing the process of step S521 or when the demonstration display flag is OFF in step S519 (step S519; No), the value of the decorative symbol process flag is set to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variable display setting process. After updating to a certain “1” (step S522), the variable display start command reception waiting process is terminated.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variable display setting process executed in step S171 of FIG. In the decorative symbol variable display setting process, the CPU 131 first reads out the variable display start buffer value from the effect control buffer setting unit of the RAM 133, for example, to determine whether or not the variable symbol display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a big hit. Is determined (step S531).

  If it is determined in step S531 that the display result is not a big hit (step S531; No), it is determined whether or not the display result is reach loss (step S532). At this time, if it is determined that the display result is reach loss (step S532; Yes), a determined decorative symbol of the reach loss combination is determined (step S533). For example, in the process of step S533, the CPU 131 extracts numerical data indicating random numbers for determining the jackpot symbol / left determined symbol, which is updated by hardware such as the random number circuit 134 or by software executed by the CPU 131, and the ROM 132 For example, the left fixed decorative symbol derived and displayed on the “left” variable display portion of the first image display device 5A is determined among the fixed decorative symbols by referring to the left fixed decorative symbol determining table stored in advance in To do. Also, the decorative symbol having the same symbol number as the left determined decorative symbol is determined as the right determined decorative symbol derived and displayed on the “right” variable display portion of the first image display device 5A among the determined decorative symbols. Further, for example, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a medium fixed symbol updated by hardware such as a random number circuit 134 or software executed by the CPU 131 is extracted, and medium fixed decorative symbol determination stored in advance in the ROM 132 or the like is extracted. By referring to the table or the like, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is derived and displayed on the “medium” variable display portion of the first image display device 5A among the fixed decorative symbols is determined. In this case, for example, when the confirmed decorative symbol becomes a jackpot combination, such as when the symbol number of the middle confirmed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol, any value (For example, “1”) may be added to or subtracted from the symbol number of the medium-decorated decorative symbol so that the finalized decorative symbol does not become a jackpot combination but a reach-losing combination.

  When it is determined in step S532 that the display result is not reach loss (step S532; No), a fixed decorative symbol for the normal loss combination is determined (step S534). For example, in the process of step S534, the CPU 131 extracts numerical data indicating random numbers for determining the jackpot symbol / left determined symbol, which is updated by hardware such as the random number circuit 134 or software executed by the CPU 131, and the ROM 132 The left determined decorative design is determined by referring to the left determined decorative design determining table stored in advance. In addition, the numerical data indicating random numbers for determining the medium fixed symbol, which is updated by hardware such as the random number circuit 134 or software executed by the CPU 131, is extracted, and the medium fixed decorative symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 132 or the like. The medium-decorated decorative pattern is determined by referring to. Further, a numerical data indicating a right-determined symbol determination random number value updated by hardware such as the random number circuit 134 or software executed by the CPU 131 is extracted, and a right-determined decorative symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 132 or the like. The right fixed decorative design is determined by referring to. At this time, for example, when the symbol pattern of the right determined decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left fixed decorative symbol, if the final symbol pattern becomes a jackpot combination or reach lose combination, an arbitrary value (for example, By adding or subtracting “1”) to / from the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol, the determined decorative symbol may be a normal lost combination instead of a big hit combination or reach lost combination.

  If it is determined in step S531 that the display result is a big hit (step S531; Yes), it is determined whether or not the display result is a probable big hit (step S535). At this time, if it is determined that the display result is a probable big hit (step S535; Yes), a definite decorative symbol of the probable big hit combination is determined (step S536). For example, in the process of step S536, the CPU 131 extracts numerical data indicating random numbers for determining the jackpot symbol / left determined symbol updated by hardware such as the random number circuit 134 or software executed by the CPU 131, and the ROM 132 For example, by referring to a probability variation design determination table stored in advance, a decision design symbol is determined from among a plurality of types of probability variation symbols.

  When it is determined in step S535 that the display result is not a probable big hit (step S535; No), a fixed decorative symbol for the normal big hit combination is determined (step S537). For example, in the process of step S537, the CPU 131 extracts numerical data indicating random numbers for determining the jackpot symbol / left determined symbol, which is updated by hardware such as the random number circuit 134 or software executed by the CPU 131, and the ROM 132 By referring to a normal symbol determination table stored in advance, etc., one of a plurality of types of normal symbols is determined as a confirmed decorative symbol.

  After the determined decorative symbol is determined in any of the processes of steps S533, S534, S536, and S537, the data indicating the determined symbol determined in each processing is stored in the fixed decorative symbol buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit of the RAM 133. The determined decorative design is saved, for example, by storing in (step S538).

  Following the processing of step S538, it is determined whether or not a reach notice is to be executed (step S539). For example, the CPU 131 extracts numerical data indicating random numbers for reach notice determination, which is updated by hardware such as the random number circuit 134 or software executed by the CPU 131 in the process of step S539, and stores it in the ROM 132 or the like in advance. It is determined whether or not to execute the reach notice by referring to the reached reach notice determination table. At this time, the reach notice pattern may be determined when the reach notice is executed. For example, in the reach notice determination table, random numbers for reach notice determination are respectively assigned to a plurality of types of reach notice patterns and a determination result that the reach notice is not executed, and correspond to the extracted random number values. Thus, the table data (determination data) may be configured so that the presence / absence of the reach notice execution and the reach notice pattern when the reach notice is executed can be determined. Here, different reach notice determination tables may be referred to depending on whether or not the decorative symbol variable display mode is set to reach. The reach notice determination table to be referred to when reaching is different from the reach notice determination table to be referred to when not reaching, by assigning a random value for determining the reach notice, the notice according to each reach notice pattern. The probability that the decorative symbol variable display mode becomes reach when an effect appears may be made different depending on whether or not reach notice is executed and each reach notice pattern.

  Following the processing of step S539, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit notice (step S540). For example, the CPU 131 extracts numerical data indicating random numbers for determining the big hit notice, which is updated by hardware such as the random number circuit 134 or software executed by the CPU 131 in the process of step S540, and stores it in the ROM 132 or the like in advance. Whether or not to execute the jackpot notice is determined by referring to the jackpot notice determination table. At this time, the jackpot notice pattern may be determined when the jackpot notice is executed. For example, in the jackpot notice determination table, random numbers for determining the jackpot notice are assigned to a plurality of types of jackpot notice patterns and a decision result that the jackpot notice is not executed, respectively, and correspond to the extracted random value. Thus, the table data (determination data) may be configured so that the presence / absence of the jackpot notice execution and the jackpot notice pattern when the jackpot notice is executed can be determined. Here, different jackpot notice determination tables may be referred to depending on whether or not the variable symbol display result of special symbols and decorative symbols is a jackpot. In addition, the jackpot notice determination table that is referred to when the jackpot is determined and the jackpot notice determination table that is referred to when the jackpot is not set are assigned different random numbers for determining the jackpot notice. The probability that the variable display result will be a big hit when an effect appears may be made different depending on whether or not the big hit notice is executed and each big hit notice pattern.

  After the processing of step S540 is performed, the production control pattern corresponding to the determination results such as the variable display pattern notified from the main board 11 by the variable display start command, the confirmed decorative pattern, the reach notice pattern, and the jackpot notice pattern is set. (Step S541). For example, in the process of step S541, the CPU 131 selects a pattern corresponding to a variable display pattern from among a plurality of types of effect control patterns stored in the effect control pattern table 230A shown in FIG. The address of the control pattern in the ROM 132 is set in the effect control pattern pointer. Further, for example, the production control process timer setting value is read from the head address of the production control pattern set in step S541 and the timer initial value in the production control process timer is set (step S542).

  Subsequent to the setting in step S542, for example, a display control command corresponding to the display control data included in the effect control pattern is transmitted from the input / output port 135 to the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121. Settings are made to start variable display of decorative symbols in apparatus 5A (step S543). Thereafter, the value of the decorative symbol process flag is updated to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the processing during variable decorative symbol display (step S544), and then the decorative symbol variable display setting processing is terminated.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a decorative symbol variable display process executed in step S172 of FIG. In the decorative symbol variable display process, the CPU 131 first updates the effect control process timer value, for example, by subtracting 1 (step S551).

  At this time, by comparing the updated production control process timer value with the production control process timer judgment value indicated by the production control pattern whose head address is set in the production control pattern pointer, etc. It is determined whether or not they match (step S552). If it does not match any timer determination value (step S552; No), the decorative symbol variable display in-process is terminated.

  When the timer determination value is matched in step S552 (step S552; Yes), various control data such as display control data, sound control data, and lamp control data stored in the effect control pattern in association with the timer determination value. Is read (step S553). At this time, it is determined whether or not the control data read in step S553 is an end code (step S554). If it is determined in step S554 that the code is not an end code (step S554; No), a command or process corresponding to the control data read in step S553 is performed (step S555), and the decorative symbol variable The displaying process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S554 that the code is an end code (step S554; Yes), the variable display count value is updated by, for example, adding 1 (step S556). Then, it is determined whether or not the updated variable display count value matches a predetermined advance transfer execution determination value (for example, “100” or the like) (step S557). At this time, if it coincides with the advance transfer execution determination value (step S557; Yes), the advance transfer command process is executed (step S558). On the other hand, when it does not agree with the advance transfer execution determination value in step S557 (step S557; No), the process of step S558 is skipped.

  Thereafter, the CPU 131 sets a big hit start command reception waiting time by, for example, setting a predetermined timer initial value in the effect control process timer (step S559). Then, after the value of the decorative symbol process flag is updated to “3” which is a value corresponding to the big hit start waiting process (step S560), the decorative symbol variable display in-process is terminated.

  In the process of step S518 shown in FIG. 43 or step S555 shown in FIG. 45, for example, the display of the sprite image on the first image display device 5A or the like is updated according to the display control data read from the effect control pattern. As processing, the CPU 131 executes image update command processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. In this image update command process, the CPU 131 first specifies an image part whose display is to be updated, for example, from display control data read from the effect control pattern corresponding to the effect control process timer value (step S571). . Subsequently, it is determined whether the reading position of the image data corresponding to the image part specified in step S571 is the fixed address area 156A provided in the temporary storage memory 156 of the VDP 141 or the image data memory 142. (Step S572). That is, it is determined whether or not the image part specified in step S571 is an effect image for which image data is to be transferred in advance to the fixed address area 156A of the temporary storage memory 156. For example, in step S572, the image part specified in step S571 in one of the advance transfer setting tables 220A and 220B depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal gaming state or the probability-changing gaming state. What is necessary is just to determine whether the table data for transferring the image data corresponding to the effect image is included.

  If it is determined in step S572 that the reading position of the image data is the fixed address area 156A (step S572; Yes), the fixed address of the temporary storage memory 156 is obtained from the display control data read from the effect control pattern, for example. The read address of the image data in area 156A is specified (step S573). Further, for example, the writing address of the image data in the frame buffer memory 157 corresponding to the display position (display coordinates) of the image part is specified from the display control data read from the effect control pattern (step S574). Furthermore, the transfer data amount of the image data corresponding to the effect image of the image part to be updated is specified (step S575). Thereafter, based on the read address in the fixed address area 156A specified in steps S573 to S575, the write address in the frame buffer memory 157, and the transfer data amount, a fixed address designation transfer command is created and the display control is performed from the input / output port 135. The data is transmitted to the VDP 141 of the unit 121 (step S576).

  If it is determined in step S572 that the read position of the image data is not the fixed address area 156A (step S572; No), the image data in the image data memory 142 is obtained from the display control data read from the effect control pattern, for example. Is specified (step S577). In addition, the writing address of the image data in the frame buffer memory 157 corresponding to the display position (display coordinates) of the image element is specified from the display control data read from the effect control pattern (step S578). Further, the transfer data amount of the image data corresponding to the effect image of the image part to be updated is specified (step S579). Thereafter, an automatic transfer command is generated based on the read address in the image data memory 142, the write address in the frame buffer memory 157, and the transfer data amount specified in steps S577 to S579, and the display control unit 121 is input from the input / output port 135. Are transmitted to the VDP 141 (step S580).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the command for all the image parts to be updated has been completed (step S581). If the command is not completed (step S581; No), the process returns to step S571. On the other hand, if the command is completed for all the image parts to be updated (step S581; Yes), the image update command process is terminated.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart illustrating an example of transfer control processing executed by the transfer control circuit 152 included in the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121. In this transfer control process, the transfer control circuit 152 first determines whether or not there is a display control command received from the effect control microcomputer 120 via the host interface 151 (step S601). If there is no reception command from the production control microcomputer 120 (step S601; No), the processing of step S601 is repeatedly executed and a standby is performed.

  If there is a reception command in step S601 (step S601; Yes), it is determined whether or not the reception command is a storage area setting command (step S602). If it is a storage area setting command (step S602; Yes), a predetermined storage area setting process is executed (step S603). If it is not a storage area setting command (step S602; No), the reception command is pre-transferred. It is determined whether it is a command (step S604).

  If the reception command is a pre-transfer command in step S604 (step S604; Yes), a predetermined pre-transfer process is executed (step S605). On the other hand, when the reception command is not the advance transfer command (step S604; No), it is determined whether or not the reception command is an automatic transfer command (step S606). At this time, if the reception command is an automatic transfer command (step S606; Yes), a predetermined automatic transfer control process is executed (step S607). On the other hand, when the reception command is not an automatic transfer command (step S606; No), it is determined whether or not the reception command is a display data transfer command (step S608).

  If the reception command is a display data transfer command in step S608 (step S608; Yes), a predetermined display data transfer process is executed (step S609). If the reception command is not a display data transfer command in step S608 (step S608; No), or after performing any of the processes in steps S603, S605, S607, and S609, the process returns to step S601.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the storage area setting process executed in step S603 of FIG. In this storage area setting process, the transfer control circuit 152 first clears the temporary storage memory 156 and initializes the stored contents (step S611). Subsequently, the address STADD that becomes the head address of the variable address area 156B is specified from the data included in the storage area setting command (step S612). Then, the address STADD specified at this time is set and stored in a predetermined register built in the VDP 141 (step S613). Further, the transfer control circuit 152 specifies the address ENADD that is the final address of the variable address area 156B from the data included in the storage area setting command (step S614). Then, the address ENADD specified at this time is set and stored in a predetermined register built in the VDP 141 (step S615), and the storage area setting process is terminated.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the advance transfer process executed in step S605 of FIG. In this advance transfer process, the transfer control circuit 152 first specifies the read address of the image data in the image data memory 142 from the data included in the advance transfer command (step S621). Subsequently, the writing address of the image data in the fixed address area 156A of the temporary storage memory 156 is specified from the data included in the advance transfer command (step S622). Further, the data amount of the image data to be transferred is specified from the data included in the advance transfer command (step S623). Then, based on the read address, write address, and transfer data amount of the image data specified in steps S621 to S623, start of data transfer so that the image data read from the image data memory 142 is transferred to the fixed address area 156A. Setting is performed (step S624). For example, in the process of step S624, the transfer control circuit 152 sends the read address of the image data memory 142, the write address of the temporary storage memory 156, and the amount of image data to be transferred to a predetermined DMA (Direct Memory Access) device. Set to instruct the start of image data transfer by DMA transfer.

  Thereafter, the transfer control circuit 152 determines whether or not the transfer of the image data has been completed (step S625), and if not completed (step S625; No), the process of step S625 is repeated and waits. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S625 that the transfer of the image data has been completed based on, for example, a predetermined transfer completion signal output from the DMA device (step S625; Yes), the index table 250 provided in the VDP 141 is stored. After registering completion of image data transfer (step S626), the pre-transfer process is terminated. In the process of step S626, the transfer control circuit 152 writes data such as “start address” and “horizontal size” that can specify the image data transferred to the fixed address area 156A to the index table 250 and responds accordingly. Set “Reading completion flag” to “On”.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of the automatic transfer control process executed in step S607 of FIG. In this automatic transfer control process, the transfer control circuit 152 first specifies the read address of the image data in the image data memory 142 from the data included in the automatic transfer command (step S631). Subsequently, the writing address of the image data in the variable address area 156B of the temporary storage memory 156 is specified (step S632). For example, in the process of step S632, the transfer control circuit 152 refers to the index table 250, and in the variable address area 156B, the “transfer completion flag” is set to “on” and valid image data or the like is stored. Identify free areas other than areas. Of the vacant areas thus identified, an area for storing the image data to be transferred this time is determined, and the head address thereof is identified as the write address.

  Further, the transfer control circuit 152 specifies the data amount of the image data to be transferred from the data included in the automatic transfer command (step S633). Then, based on the read address, write address, and transfer data amount of the image data specified in steps S631 to S633, start of data transfer so that the image data read from the image data memory 142 is transferred to the variable address area 156B. Setting is performed (step S634). For example, in step S634, the transfer control circuit 152 sets the read address of the image data memory 142, the write address of the temporary storage memory 156, and the data amount of image data to be transferred to a predetermined DMA device. Instructs start of transfer of image data by transfer.

  Thereafter, the transfer control circuit 152 determines whether or not the transfer of the image data has been completed (step S635). If the transfer has not been completed (step S635; No), the process of step S635 is repeated and waits. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S635 that the transfer of the image data has been completed based on, for example, a predetermined transfer completion signal output from the DMA device (step S635; Yes), the index table 250 provided in the VDP 141 is stored. After registering the completion of image data transfer (step S636), the automatic transfer control process is terminated. When image data is transferred by this automatic transfer control process, the drawing circuit 155 is notified of the transfer destination address (write address) of the image data in the variable address area 156B of the temporary storage memory 156, and the drawing circuit It may be possible to read image data according to 155.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the display data transfer process executed in step S609 of FIG. In the display data transfer process, the transfer control circuit 152 first specifies the read address of the display data in the frame buffer memory 157 from the data included in the display data transfer command (step S641). Subsequently, the write address of the display data in the variable address area 156B of the temporary storage memory 156 is specified (step S642). For example, in the process of step S642, the transfer control circuit 152 refers to the index table 250, and in the variable address area 156B, the “transfer completion flag” is “on” and valid image data and the like are stored. Identify free areas other than areas. Of the vacant areas thus identified, an area for storing display data to be transferred this time is determined, and the head address thereof is identified as the write address.

  Further, the transfer control circuit 152 specifies the amount of display data to be transferred from the data included in the display data transfer command (step S643). Then, the data transfer is performed so that the display data read from the frame buffer memory 157 is transferred to the variable address area 156B based on the read address, the write address, and the transfer data amount of the display data specified in steps S641 to S643. Is set (step S644). For example, the transfer control circuit 152 sets a read address of the frame buffer memory 157, a write address of the temporary storage memory 156, and a data amount of display data to be transferred to a predetermined DMA device in the process of step S644. Instruct to start transfer of display data by DMA device.

  In the processing of step S644, the transfer control circuit 152 may store the display data read from the frame buffer memory 157 as one-dimensional data corresponding to the address assigned in the temporary storage memory 156. . Alternatively, the transfer control circuit 152 may be expanded as two-dimensional data corresponding to the display coordinates of the effect image on the display screen of the second image display device 5B. Here, if the display data is stored as one-dimensional data corresponding to the address assigned in the temporary storage memory 156, the temporary storage memory 156 is not restricted by the horizontal size or vertical size of the effect image. Since the display data can be written to continuous addresses in the variable address area 156B, the use efficiency of the temporary storage memory 156 can be improved. On the other hand, if the display data is stored as two-dimensional data corresponding to the display coordinates of the effect image on the display screen of the second image display device 5B, the reading position and display of the display data read from the temporary storage memory 156 are displayed. The display coordinates on the screen can be made to correspond one-to-one. For example, the processing load required for converting the storage address of the temporary storage memory 156 into the display coordinates of the effect image on the display screen of the second image display device 5B is reduced. Can be reduced. Here, whether the display data stored in the variable address area 156B of the temporary storage memory 156 is one-dimensional data or two-dimensional data depends on whether the display screen of the second image display device 5B such as the LCD drive circuit 125 is used. What is necessary is just to design suitably according to the performance of the circuit which displays an effect image on top.

  Thereafter, the transfer control circuit 152 determines whether or not the transfer of the display data has been completed (step S645), and if not completed (step S645; No), the process of step S645 is repeated and waits. On the other hand, for example, if it is determined in step S645 that the transfer of display data has been completed based on the output of a predetermined transfer completion signal from the DMA device (step S645; Yes), the index table 250 included in the VDP 141 is provided. In step S646, the display data transfer process is terminated.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a drawing process executed by the drawing circuit 155 provided in the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121. In this drawing process, the drawing circuit 155 first determines whether or not there is a display control command received from the effect control microcomputer 120 via the host interface 151 (step S701). If there is no reception command from the production control microcomputer 120 (step S701; No), the process of step S701 is repeatedly executed and waits.

  If there is a reception command in step S701 (step S701; Yes), it is determined whether or not the reception command is a fixed address designation transfer command (step S702). If it is a fixed address designation transfer command (step S702; Yes), a predetermined fixed address designation drawing process is executed (step S703). If it is not a fixed address designation transfer command (step S702; No), a reception command is issued. Is an automatic transfer command (step S704).

  If the reception command is an automatic transfer command in step S704 (step S704; Yes), a predetermined automatic transfer drawing process is executed (step S705). If the reception command is not an automatic transfer command in step S704 (step S704; No), or after performing any of the processes in steps S703 and S705, the process returns to step S701.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of the fixed address designation drawing process executed in step S703 of FIG. In this fixed address designation drawing process, the drawing circuit 155 first specifies the read address of the image data in the fixed address area 156A of the temporary storage memory 156 from the data included in the fixed address designation transfer command (step S711). Subsequently, the index table 250 is referred to based on the read address specified in step S711, and it is determined whether or not the “transfer completion flag” associated with the image data to be read is “ON” ( Step S712).

  When the “transfer completion flag” is “ON” in step S712 (step S712; Yes), the write address of the display data in the frame buffer memory 157 is specified from the data included in the fixed address designation transfer command. (Step S713). Thereafter, the drawing circuit 155 performs a reading operation of image data from the reading address specified in step S711 and a writing operation of display data to the writing address specified in step S713. The display data is expanded and stored in 157 (step S714). At this time, if the image data read from the fixed address area 156A of the temporary storage memory 156 is pixel data, the image data read from the fixed address area 156A is directly written into the frame buffer memory 157 as display data. That's fine. On the other hand, when the image data read from the fixed address area 156A of the temporary storage memory 156 is vector data such as points, lines, and polygons, pixel data is created based on the vector data read from the fixed address area 156A. The pixel data may be written into the frame buffer memory 157 as display data. If the image data read from the fixed address area 156A of the temporary storage memory 156 is subjected to predetermined compression encoding such as discrete cosine transform (DCT) or Hadamard transform, a fixed address is used. Pixel data obtained by performing a predetermined decoding process on the image data read from the area 156A may be written in the frame buffer memory 157 as display data. Note that when the image data used to create display data is image data for 3D display or vector data such as polygons, the VDP 141 does not access the image data memory 142, and a predetermined CPU is used. (For example, the CPU 131 of the production control microcomputer 120 or the like) may access the image data memory 142 and read the image data. In this case, data obtained as a result of executing a predetermined calculation process based on the image data read by the CPU may be transferred to the VDP 141. In this case, in the VDP 141, for example, the drawing circuit 155 may create display data based on the data transferred from the CPU and develop and store it in the frame buffer memory 157.

  The drawing circuit 155 may expand the display data as one-dimensional data corresponding to the address assigned in the frame buffer memory 157 when the display data is expanded and stored in the frame buffer memory 157. Alternatively, the drawing circuit 155 may be developed as two-dimensional data corresponding to the display coordinates of the effect image on the display screen of the first image display device 5A or the second image display device 5B. Here, if the display data is expanded as one-dimensional data corresponding to the address assigned in the frame buffer memory 157, the frame buffer memory 157 is not restricted by the horizontal size or vertical size of the effect image. Since the display data can be written to consecutive addresses, the use efficiency of the frame buffer memory 157 can be improved. On the other hand, if the display data is expanded as two-dimensional data corresponding to the display coordinates of the effect image on the display screen of the first image display device 5A or the second image display device 5B, the display data read from the frame buffer memory 157 is displayed. The data reading position and the display coordinates on the display screen can be made to correspond one-to-one. For example, from the storage address of the frame buffer memory 157, the display image of the first image display device 5A or the second image display device 5B is displayed. It is possible to reduce the processing load required for converting the effect image into the display coordinates. Here, whether the display data expanded and stored in the first display data area 157A provided in the frame buffer memory 157 is one-dimensional data or two-dimensional data is determined by the liquid crystal driver included in the display circuit 158 The design may be appropriately performed according to the performance of the circuit that displays the effect image on the display screen of the first image display device 5A. Whether the display data expanded and stored in the second display data area 157B provided in the frame buffer memory 157 is one-dimensional data or two-dimensional data is determined by a second image such as the LCD drive circuit 125. What is necessary is just to design suitably according to the performance of the circuit which displays an effect image on the display screen of the display apparatus 5B.

  In addition, in the process of step S714, display data (write-side data) to be written to the frame buffer memory 157 and display data (stored) that has already been stored in the frame buffer memory 157 corresponding to each pixel. Side data) and display data is written for pixels with higher write side data priority, while display data is written for pixels with higher memory side data priority. Do not. As a specific example, the frame buffer memory 157 is provided with an area for storing a Z value corresponding to the priority assigned to the storage side data of each pixel, in addition to the area for storing the pixel data of each pixel. ing. The image data read from the temporary storage memory 156 by the drawing circuit 155 also includes data indicating the Z value corresponding to the priority of each pixel. Then, the drawing circuit 155 determines which of the writing side data and the storage side data has the higher priority by performing a Z value comparison operation on the writing side data and the storage side data of each pixel. That's fine. For example, in the image data corresponding to a predetermined character image, the priority in each pixel is set in advance so as to be higher than the image data corresponding to the background image. Thereby, the display data can be written to the frame buffer memory 157 so that the character image appears in front of the background image.

  After executing the processing of step S714, it is determined whether or not drawing by writing display data to the frame buffer memory 157 is completed (step S715). If not completed (step S715; No), reading is performed. After updating the address and the write address (step S716), the process returns to step S714. On the other hand, when the drawing is completed in step S715 (step S715; Yes), the fixed address designation drawing process is terminated.

  If the “transfer completion flag” is “OFF” in step S712 (step S712; No), it is determined whether or not a predetermined transfer completion waiting time has elapsed (step S717). At this time, if the transfer completion waiting time has not elapsed (step S717; No), the process returns to step S712 and waits. On the other hand, when the transfer completion waiting time has elapsed in step S717 (step S717; Yes), for example, predetermined error information is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 120 via the host interface 151. After notifying that an error has occurred (step S718), the fixed address designation drawing process is terminated. In the effect control microcomputer 120 that has received the error information transmitted by the drawing circuit 155 executing the process of step S718, for example, the CPU 131 sends a predetermined control command to the sound control unit 122 or the lamp control unit 123. Thus, the occurrence of an error may be notified by outputting a sound from the speakers 8L and 8R or lighting or blinking a predetermined lamp or LED. At this time, the display operation in the first image display device 5A and the second image display device 5B is performed by notifying the occurrence of an error by outputting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R or lighting or blinking a predetermined lamp or LED. Even when an abnormality occurs and display cannot be performed correctly, the occurrence of an error can be appropriately notified. Alternatively, for example, the CPU 131 reads out predetermined error display image data stored in the ROM 132 and supplies the image data to the LCD drive circuit 125 from the input / output port 135, thereby generating an error due to the image display in the second image display device 5B. You may make it alert | report.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an example of the automatic transfer drawing process executed in step S705 of FIG. In this automatic transfer drawing process, the drawing circuit 155 first specifies the read address of the image data in the variable address area 156B of the temporary storage memory 156 based on, for example, a notification from the transfer control circuit 152 (step S731). Subsequently, the index table 250 is referenced based on the read address specified in step S731, and it is determined whether or not the “transfer completion flag” associated with the image data to be read is “ON” (step S731). Step S732).

  When the “transfer completion flag” is “ON” in step S732 (step S732; Yes), the write address of the display data in the frame buffer memory 157 is specified from the data included in the automatic transfer command ( Step S733). Thereafter, the drawing circuit 155 performs an image data read operation from the read address specified in step S731 and an image data write operation to the write address specified in step S733 (step S734). At this time, when the image data read from the variable address area 156B of the temporary storage memory 156 is pixel data, the image data read from the variable address area 156B is directly written into the frame buffer memory 157 as display data. That's fine. On the other hand, when the image data read from the variable address area 156B of the temporary storage memory 156 is vector data such as points, lines, and polygons, pixel data is created based on the vector data read from the variable address area 156B. The pixel data may be written into the frame buffer memory 157 as display data. Further, when the image data read from the variable address area 156B of the temporary storage memory 156 is subjected to predetermined compression encoding such as discrete cosine transform (DCT) or Hadamard transform, a variable address Pixel data obtained by performing a predetermined decoding process on the image data read from the area 156B may be written in the frame buffer memory 157 as display data. Note that when the image data used to create display data is image data for 3D display or vector data such as polygons, the VDP 141 does not access the image data memory 142, and a predetermined CPU is used. (For example, the CPU 131 of the production control microcomputer 120 or the like) may access the image data memory 142 and read the image data. In this case, data obtained as a result of executing a predetermined calculation process based on the image data read by the CPU may be transferred to the VDP 141. In this case, in the VDP 141, for example, the drawing circuit 155 may create display data based on the data transferred from the CPU and develop and store it in the frame buffer memory 157.

  The drawing circuit 155 may expand the display data as one-dimensional data corresponding to the address assigned in the frame buffer memory 157 when the display data is expanded and stored in the frame buffer memory 157. Alternatively, the drawing circuit 155 may be developed as two-dimensional data corresponding to the display coordinates of the effect image on the display screen of the first image display device 5A or the second image display device 5B. Here, whether the display data expanded and stored in the first display data area 157A provided in the frame buffer memory 157 is one-dimensional data or two-dimensional data is determined by the liquid crystal driver included in the display circuit 158 The design may be appropriately performed according to the performance of the circuit that displays the effect image on the display screen of the first image display device 5A. Whether the display data expanded and stored in the second display data area 157B provided in the frame buffer memory 157 is one-dimensional data or two-dimensional data is determined by a second image such as the LCD drive circuit 125. What is necessary is just to design suitably according to the performance of the circuit which displays an effect image on the display screen of the display apparatus 5B. In addition, in the process of step S734, display data (write side data) to be written to the frame buffer memory 157 from now on and display data (memory) already stored in the frame buffer memory 157 corresponding to each pixel. Side data) and display data is written for pixels with higher write side data priority, while display data is written for pixels with higher memory side data priority. You don't have to.

  After executing the process of step S734, it is determined whether or not drawing by writing display data to the frame buffer memory 157 is completed (step S735). If not completed (step S735; No), reading is performed. After updating the address and the write address (step S736), the process returns to step S734. On the other hand, if the drawing is completed in step S735 (step S735; Yes), the “transfer completion flag” registered in the index table 250 in association with the image data used for drawing is cleared and set to “off”. (Step S737), the automatic transfer drawing process is terminated.

  If the “transfer completion flag” is “off” in step S732 (step S732; No), it is determined whether a predetermined transfer completion waiting time has elapsed (step S738). At this time, if the transfer completion waiting time has not elapsed (step S738; No), the process returns to step S732 and waits. On the other hand, when the transfer completion waiting time has elapsed in step S738 (step S738; Yes), for example, predetermined error information is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 120 via the host interface 151. After notifying that an error has occurred (step S739), the automatic transfer drawing process is terminated. When the rendering control microcomputer 120 receives the error information transmitted by the drawing circuit 155 executing the process of step S739, the CPU 131, for example, receives the error information transmitted by the process of step S718. Notification of the occurrence of an error by sending a predetermined control command to the sound control unit 122 or the lamp control unit 123, or by turning on or flashing a predetermined lamp or LED, etc. You just have to do it. Alternatively, for example, the CPU 131 reads out predetermined error display image data stored in the ROM 132 and supplies the image data to the LCD drive circuit 125 from the input / output port 135, thereby generating an error due to the image display in the second image display device 5B. You may make it alert | report.

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a moving image decoding process executed by the moving image decoder 154 included in the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121. The moving picture decoder 154 starts execution of the moving picture decoding process as shown in FIG. 55 in response to receiving the moving picture decoding command from the effect control microcomputer 120. In this moving image decoding process, the moving image decoder 154 first reads out picture data indicating a picture for one frame from moving image data used for effect display stored in the image data memory 142 (step S751). . When the moving image decoder 154 reads out moving image data stored in the image data memory 142, for example, a moving image display command such as a multi-view setting command transmitted from the effect control microcomputer 120 in advance is used. In response to the setting command, the bus width of the data bus for reading moving image data from the image data memory 142 is 32 bits wide, for example, a bus width different from that when the transfer control circuit 152 reads sprite image data from the image data memory 142 Is set to Also, the picture data is read out in an order that can be reproduced according to the order arranged in the moving image data. Note that the playback order and the decoding order do not necessarily match. For example, a B picture is decoded after an I picture or a P picture arranged thereafter is decoded. In the process of step S751, the moving image decoder 154 responds to a setting command for displaying individual moving images, such as a moving image display setting command transmitted from the effect control microcomputer 120 in advance, in response to a setting command for displaying individual moving images. A read pointer value (read pointer value) for designating a read position (for example, read address) of moving image data in the data memory 142 or a write position (for example, write) for writing display data after decoding in the frame buffer memory 157 A write pointer value (write pointer value) for designating an address), a picture buffer position (for example, storage) for temporarily storing decoded image data corresponding to individual moving images in the variable address area 156B of the temporary storage memory 156 Picture buffer pointer value (picture buffer) that specifies the address May be performed to set the pointer value).

  When moving image data composed of compressed data subjected to compression encoding is read out, the VDP 141 does not access the image data memory 142, and a predetermined CPU (for example, the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120). Moving image data may be read by accessing the image data memory 142. In this case, the moving image data read by the CPU may be transferred to the VDP 141 as it is. In this case, in the VDP 141, for example, the moving image decoder 154 may receive the transferred moving image data via the external interface such as the host interface 151 in the process of step S751.

  After reading out the picture data in step S751, the moving picture decoder 154 decodes the read data (step S752), and the decoded picture data is stored in the variable address area 156B of the temporary storage memory 156 as a picture buffer pointer value. Is temporarily stored in a picture buffer corresponding to, and then written and stored in the write address of the frame buffer memory 157 corresponding to the write pointer value, thereby moving the moving image to the first image display device 5A or the second image display device. Display is possible at a predetermined position in the display screen of 5B (step S753). Note that the drawing circuit 155 may execute the process of reading the picture data temporarily stored in the variable address area 156B of the temporary storage memory 156 and writing it into the frame buffer memory 157.

  Following the processing in step S753, the read pointer value is updated (step S754). Here, when a plurality of picture buffers provided in the variable address area 156B of the temporary storage memory 156 are used to reproduce and display one moving image, the picture buffer pointer value is also updated in the process of step S754. You can do it. When the decoding of picture data for one frame is completed in this way, the moving picture decoder 154 causes the host interface 151 to output an event interrupt signal to the effect control microcomputer 120 (step S755). As a result, the completion of decoding of the picture data for one frame is notified from the VDP 141 to the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120. Then, for example, the timer for measuring the output period of the event interrupt signal is started, and the signal output period is ended by determining whether or not the timer value has reached a predetermined signal output period determination value. It is determined whether or not (step S756). Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not the signal output period has ended by determining whether or not a response signal for receiving the event interrupt signal from the effect control microcomputer 120 has been received.

  If the signal output period does not end in step S756 (step S756; No), the process of step S756 is repeatedly executed and waits. On the other hand, when the signal output period ends (step S756; Yes), the output of the event interrupt signal is stopped (step S757), and then the moving image decoding process ends.

  In the VDP 141, display data stored in the first display data area 157A of the frame buffer memory 157 is read out by the display circuit 158, for example, corresponding to the refresh timing of the display image in the first image display device 5A. The moving image decoder 154 and the drawing circuit 155 allow the first display data area of the frame buffer memory 157 to update the effect image for one frame before the display circuit 158 starts reading the display data. The display data writing operation for 157A may be completed.

  Hereinafter, an example of specific control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on and the supply of the power supply voltage is started from a predetermined power supply board, the effect control microcomputer 120 is activated on the effect control board 12, and the CPU 131 executes the initialization process. (Step S51 in FIG. 38), a storage area setting command process is executed (Step S52). In the storage area setting command process, in the effect control microcomputer 120, the CPU 131 causes the input / output port 135 to transmit a storage area setting command to the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121 (step S133 in FIG. 39).

  In the VDP 141, for example, in response to receiving the storage area setting command (step S602 in FIG. 47; Yes), the transfer control circuit 152 executes a storage area setting process (step S603). In this storage area setting process, the address STADD and the address ENADD notified by the storage area setting command are stored in the internal register of the VDP 141 (steps S613 and S615 in FIG. 48). A fixed address area 156A and a variable address area 156B are arranged.

  FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the image data processing operation in the display control unit 121 mounted on the effect control board 12. In response to the activation of the effect control microcomputer 120, the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 executes a pre-transfer command process (step S53 in FIG. 38). Then, in the advance transfer command process, for example, from the advance transfer setting tables 220A and 220B shown in FIG. 17B, it is determined whether or not the control for changing the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the probability changing gaming state is started. The set is set (steps S141 to S144 in FIG. 40). Subsequently, a pre-transfer command is created and transmitted to the VDP 141 based on the read address, write address, and transfer data amount of the image data specified from the table data read according to the number of processes and the pre-transfer count value (step S1). S147 to S153). Thereby, among a plurality of types of image data stored in the image data memory 142, the execution frequency of the image display by the effect image corresponding to each image data is the execution frequency of the image display by the effect image corresponding to the required image data. A command is issued to read image data higher than the image data from the image data memory 142 and transfer it to the fixed address area 156A in the temporary storage memory 156.

  In the VDP 141, for example, the transfer control circuit 152 executes the pre-transfer process in response to receiving the pre-transfer command (Step S604 in FIG. 47; Yes) (Step S605). In this advance transfer process, image data is read from the image data memory 142 based on the read address, write address, transfer data amount, etc. of the image data notified by the advance transfer instruction, and the fixed address area 156A of the temporary storage memory 156 is read. (Steps S621 to S625 in FIG. 49). Thereby, among a plurality of types of image data stored in the image data memory 142, the execution frequency of the image display by the effect image corresponding to each image data is the execution frequency of the image display by the effect image corresponding to the required image data. Higher image data than can be read from the image data memory 142 and transferred to the fixed address area 156A in the temporary storage memory 156.

  Thereafter, in response to the game ball that has been driven into the game area having won a start winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 6, the special symbol display device 4 uses the special game or the first image display device 5A. An execution condition for executing variable display of decorative symbols is established. Based on the establishment of such execution conditions, for example, in the first image display device 5A, variable display of decorative symbols is started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” variable display units. At this time, in the effect control microcomputer 120, for example, the CPU 131 can select a variable display pattern indicated in the variable display start command from a plurality of kinds of effect control patterns stored in the effect control pattern table 230A shown in FIG. An effect control pattern is set corresponding to the determination result of whether or not to execute the reach notice and the big hit notice (step S541 in FIG. 44). Thereafter, the effect control process timer value is periodically updated (step S551 in FIG. 45). Based on the display control data read from the effect control pattern corresponding to the updated effect control process timer value (step S553), If it is the display update timing in the one image display device 5A or the second image display device 5B (step S554; No), a command or process corresponding to the display control data is performed (step S555).

  In addition, the execution condition for executing the special symbol game by the special symbol display device 4 and the variable display of the decorative symbol in the first image display device 5A is not satisfied, and the demonstration display is performed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. When the command is transmitted (step S213 in FIG. 34, etc.), for example, the CPU 131 performs a demo corresponding to the demo display command from among a plurality of types of effect control patterns stored in the effect control pattern table 230B shown in FIG. A display effect control pattern is set (step S510 in FIG. 43). Thereafter, the effect control process timer value is periodically updated (step S514). Based on the display control data read from the demonstration display effect control pattern corresponding to the updated effect control process timer value (step S516), If it is the display update timing in the one image display device 5A or the second image display device 5B (step S517; No), a command or process corresponding to the display control data is performed (step S518).

  For example, the CPU 131 can execute an image update command process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 46 as a process for updating the display of the sprite image according to the display control data read from the effect control pattern. In this image update command process, it is determined whether or not the reading position of the image data corresponding to the effect image to be updated is in fixed address area 156A (step S572 in FIG. 46).

  As an example, when the effect image to be updated shows a decorative design, the effect image is a target to which image data is transferred in advance to the fixed address area 156A, and the corresponding image data is read out. It is determined that the position is fixed address area 156A. Based on the determination result that the reading position is the fixed address area 156A (step S572; Yes), the CPU 131 reads the image data reading position in the fixed address area 156A, for example, by display control data read from the effect control pattern, The image data writing position in the frame buffer memory 157, the amount of image data to be transferred, etc. are specified, a fixed address designation transfer command is created, and transmitted from the input / output port 135 to the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121. (Steps S573 to S576).

  In the VDP 141, for example, in response to the drawing circuit 155 receiving a fixed address designation transfer command (step S702 in FIG. 52; Yes), the fixed address designation drawing process is executed (step S703). In this fixed address designation drawing process, when the “transfer completion flag” associated with the image data to be read from the fixed address area 156A in the index table 250 is “ON” (step S712 in FIG. 53; Yes). The image data read from the fixed address area 156A is written into the frame buffer memory 157 based on the read address, write address, transfer data amount, etc. of the image data specified from the data included in the fixed address designation transfer command. Store (steps S713 to S716).

  If the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 determines that the image data read position corresponding to the effect image to be updated is not the fixed address area 156A (step S572 in FIG. 46; No), For example, the image data reading position in the image data memory 142, the writing position of the image data in the frame buffer memory 157, the data amount of the image data to be transferred, and the like are specified by the display control data read from the effect control pattern and automatically transferred. A command is created and transmitted from the input / output port 135 to the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121 (steps S577 to S580).

  In the VDP 141, first, the transfer control circuit 152 executes an automatic transfer control process in response to receiving the automatic transfer command (step S606 in FIG. 47; Yes) (step S607). In this automatic transfer control process, the read address of the image data in the image data memory 142 is specified from the data included in the automatic transfer command (step S631 in FIG. 50). On the other hand, the write address of the image data in the variable address area 156B of the temporary storage memory 156 is selected to store the image data from the empty area specified by referring to the index table 250, for example. The start address of the area is automatically specified by the transfer control circuit 152 (step S632). Then, based on the data amount of image data to be transferred notified by the automatic transfer command (step S633), the image data read from the image data memory 142 is written and stored in the variable address area 156B of the temporary storage memory 156 (step S633). S634, S635).

  Subsequently, in the VDP 141, for example, the drawing circuit 155 executes the automatic transfer drawing process in response to receiving the automatic transfer command (step S704 in FIG. 52; Yes) (step S705). In this automatic transfer drawing process, when the “transfer completion flag” associated with the image data to be read from the variable address area 156B in the index table 250 is “ON” (step S732 in FIG. 54; Yes). For example, the read address of the image data in the variable address area 156B notified from the transfer control circuit 152, the write address of the image data specified from the data included in the automatic transfer command, the data amount of the image data to be transferred, etc. Based on this, the image data read from the variable address area 156B is written and stored in the frame buffer memory 157 (steps S733 to S736).

  When the transfer of the image data by writing the image data read from the image data memory 142 to the fixed address area 156A or the variable address area 156B of the temporary storage memory 156 is completed, the transfer control circuit 152 is an index provided in the VDP 141. The table 250 is updated.

  For example, when data transfer from the image data memory 142 to the fixed address area 156A of the temporary storage memory 156 is completed in response to the advance transfer command (step S625 in FIG. 49; Yes), the data is transferred to the fixed address area 156A. The data such as “start address” and “horizontal size” that can identify the image data is written into the index table 250 and the corresponding “reading completion flag” is set to “on”. The completion of image data transfer is registered (step S626).

  Further, for example, when the data transfer from the image data memory 142 to the variable address area 156B of the temporary storage memory 156 is completed in response to the automatic transfer command (step S635 in FIG. 50; Yes), the process proceeds to the variable address area 156B. By writing data such as “start address” and “horizontal size” that can specify the transferred image data to the index table 250 and setting the corresponding “read completion flag” to “on”, the index table The completion of image data transfer is registered in 250 (step S636).

  Based on the registered contents of the index table 250, the drawing circuit 155 determines whether it is possible to read out the image data from the temporary storage memory 156 and create display data.

  For example, in response to receiving the fixed address designation transfer command, the drawing circuit 155 displays the “transfer completion flag” associated with the image data to be read from the fixed address area 156A as “ON” in the index table 250. Is determined (step S712 in FIG. 53). At this time, if the “reading completion flag” is “ON” (step S712; Yes), based on the determination that the drawing circuit 155 can read the image data from the fixed address area 156A and create display data. Processing for creating display data is performed by writing the image data read from the fixed address area 156A into the frame buffer memory 157 and storing it (steps S713 to S716). On the other hand, if the “reading completion flag” is “off” (step S712; No), it is determined that the drawing circuit 155 cannot read the image data from the fixed address area 156A and create display data. Based on the above, it waits until the transfer completion waiting time elapses (step S717; No). During this standby, the creation of display data using the image data read from the fixed address area 156A is not executed.

  In addition, for example, in response to receiving the automatic transfer command, the drawing circuit 155 displays a “transfer completion flag” associated with the image data to be read from the variable address area 156B in the index table 250 as “ON”. Is determined (step S732 in FIG. 54). At this time, if the “reading completion flag” is “ON” (step S732; Yes), based on the determination that the drawing circuit 155 can read the image data from the variable address area 156B and create display data. Processing for creating display data is performed by writing the image data read from the variable address area 156B into the frame buffer memory 157 and storing it (steps S733 to S737). On the other hand, if the “transfer completion flag” is “off” (step S732; No), it is determined that the drawing circuit 155 cannot read the image data from the variable address area 156B and create display data. Based on the above, it waits until the transfer completion waiting time elapses (step S738; No). During this standby, display data creation using image data read from the variable address area 156B is not executed.

  In the effect control microcomputer 120, the CPU 131 can create a display data transfer command according to the display control data read from the effect control pattern and transmit it to the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121 from the input / output port 135. . In the VDP 141, for example, in response to receiving the display data transfer command (step S608 in FIG. 47; Yes), the transfer control circuit 152 executes display data transfer processing (step S609). In this display data transfer process, the display data read address in the second display data area 157B of the frame buffer memory 157 is specified from the data included in the display data transfer command (step S641 in FIG. 51). . On the other hand, the write address of the display data in the variable address area 156B of the temporary storage memory 156 is selected to store the display data from the free space specified by referring to the index table 250, for example. The transfer control circuit 152 automatically specifies the start address of the designated area (step S642). Then, based on the data amount of image data to be transferred notified by the display data transfer command (step S643), the image data read from the frame buffer memory 157 is written and stored in the variable address area 156B of the temporary storage memory 156. (Steps S644 and S645). Thus, the display data stored in the variable address area 156B of the temporary storage memory 156 can be read from the effect control microcomputer 120 via the host interface 151, and transferred to, for example, the RAM 133 of the effect control microcomputer 120. The

  After setting the demonstration display effect control pattern in step S510 of FIG. 43, the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 returns to step S518 based on the display control data read from the demonstration display effect control pattern in step S516. Various commands and processes. FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the demonstration display effect control pattern set in step S510.

  Based on the demonstration display effect control pattern as shown in FIG. 57, the CPU 131 transmits various display control commands from the input / output port 135 to the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121. The image data processing according to the display control command is executed. 58 is a flowchart showing a process for displaying a demo screen, which is executed by the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 and the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121 based on the demonstration display effect control pattern as shown in FIG. is there. FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an image data processing operation executed by the effect control microcomputer 120 and the display control unit 121 in order to perform the demonstration screen display in the second image display device 5B.

  In the process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 58, first, the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 determines whether or not the display data development timing corresponding to the demo screen has come based on the effect control process timer value (step). ST11). In the process of step ST11, for example, the CPU 131 is designated as the demonstration screen # 1 development determination value by the effect control process timer value and the demonstration display effect control pattern shown in FIG. 57 in the process of step S515 shown in FIG. This corresponds to determining whether or not the effect control process timer determination value # A1 matches. At this time, if it is determined that it is not the development timing of the demonstration screen display data (step ST11; No), the processing of step ST11 is repeated and the process waits.

  For example, if the effect control process timer value matches the effect control process timer determination value # A1 specified in the demonstration display effect control pattern shown in FIG. 57, it is determined that it is the development timing of the demonstration screen display data. . When the development timing of the demo screen display data is reached (step ST11; Yes), for example, the CPU 131 displays display control data associated with the production control process timer determination value # A1 in the demonstration display production control pattern shown in FIG. # A1 is read, and a command and processing for developing image data used for displaying the demonstration screen # 1 as shown in FIG. At this time, based on the display control data # A1, the CPU 131 frames display data for the demonstration screen # 1, such as an automatic transfer command and a fixed address designation transfer command, from the input / output port 135 to the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121. A display control command for writing to the buffer memory 157 is transmitted. For example, when the image data used for displaying the demo screen # 1 is stored in the fixed address area 156A of the temporary storage memory 156 by the pre-transfer process, the fixed address designation transfer corresponding to the display control data # A1 is performed. The command may be transmitted.

  In the VDP 141, when the fixed address designation transfer command is received, the image data specified by the drawing circuit 155 from the data included in the fixed address designation transfer command is read from the fixed address area 156A of the temporary storage memory 156, and the frame buffer memory 157 is read. By writing in the second display data area 157B, the display data of the demo screen # 1 is developed and stored in the frame buffer memory 157 (step ST12). For example, the drawing circuit 155 executes the fixed address designation drawing process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 53 in step S703 of FIG. 52, or the transfer control circuit 152 performs the process of step ST12 in step S607 of FIG. The automatic transfer control process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 50 is executed, and the drawing circuit 155 corresponds to executing the automatic transfer drawing process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 54 in step S705 of FIG.

  Thereafter, the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 determines whether or not it is the transfer timing for transferring the display data from the frame buffer memory 157 to the temporary storage memory 156 based on the effect control process timer value (step ST13). ). In the process of step ST13, for example, the CPU 131 is designated as the demonstration screen # 1 transfer determination value by the effect control process timer value and the demonstration display effect control pattern shown in FIG. 57 in the process of step S515 shown in FIG. This corresponds to determining whether or not the effect control process timer determination value # A2 matches. At this time, when it is determined that it is not the transfer timing of the display data (step ST13; No), the process of step ST13 is repeated and waits.

  For example, when the effect control process timer value matches the effect control process timer determination value # A2 specified in the demonstration display effect control pattern shown in FIG. 57, it is determined that it is the display data transfer timing. When the display data transfer timing is thus reached (step ST13; Yes), for example, the CPU 131 displays the display control data # A2 associated with the effect control process timer determination value # A2 in the demonstration display effect control pattern shown in FIG. And the VDP 141 performs a command and processing for transferring the display data expanded and stored in the second display data area 157B of the frame buffer memory 157 to the temporary storage memory 156. At this time, the CPU 131 transmits a display data transfer command from the input / output port 135 to the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121 based on the display control data # A2.

  In the VDP 141, the display data specified by the transfer control circuit 152 from the data included in the display data transfer command is read from the second display data area 157B of the frame buffer memory 157 and stored in the variable address area 156B of the temporary storage memory 156. By writing, the display data of the demo screen # 1 is transferred from the frame buffer memory 157 to the temporary storage memory 156 (step ST14). The processing in step ST14 corresponds to, for example, that the transfer control circuit 152 executes display data transfer processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 51 in step S609 shown in FIG.

  Subsequently, the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 determines whether or not the read timing for reading and acquiring the display data from the temporary storage memory 156 of the VDP 141 is reached based on the effect control process timer value (step ST15). . In the process of step ST15, for example, the CPU 131 is designated as the demonstration screen # 1 data acquisition determination value by the effect control process timer value and the demonstration display effect control pattern shown in FIG. This corresponds to determining whether or not the production control process timer determination value # A3 matches. At this time, if it is determined that it is not the timing for reading the display data (step ST15; No), the processing of step ST15 is repeated and the process waits.

  For example, when the effect control process timer value matches the effect control process timer determination value # A3 specified in the demonstration display effect control pattern shown in FIG. 57, it is determined that the display data reading timing is reached. When the display data read timing is reached in this way (step ST15; Yes), for example, the CPU 131 accesses the temporary storage memory 156 of the VDP 141 from the input / output port 135 to read the display data of the demonstration screen # 1 for effect control. The data is transferred to and stored in the RAM 133 of the microcomputer 120 (step ST16). The process of step ST16 corresponds to, for example, the CPU 131 executing a process corresponding to the display control data # A3 read from the demonstration display effect control pattern shown in FIG. 57 in step S518 shown in FIG.

  Further, the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 supplies the display data stored in the RAM 133 to the LCD drive circuit 125 based on the effect control process timer value, and whether or not the demonstration screen display timing for displaying the demonstration screen has come. Is determined (step ST17). In the process of step ST17, for example, the CPU 131 is designated as the demonstration screen # 1 display determination value by the effect control process timer value and the demonstration display effect control pattern shown in FIG. 57 in the process of step S515 shown in FIG. This corresponds to determining whether or not the effect control process timer determination value # A4 matches. At this time, if it is determined that it is not the demonstration screen display timing (step ST17; No), the processing of step ST17 is repeated and the process waits.

  For example, if the effect control process timer value matches the effect control process timer determination value # A4 specified in the demonstration display effect control pattern shown in FIG. 57, it is determined that it is the demonstration screen display timing. When the demo screen display timing is thus reached (step ST17; Yes), for example, the CPU 131 reads display data for the demo screen # 1 from the RAM 133 and supplies it to the LCD drive circuit 125 (step ST18). The LCD drive circuit 125 drives the second image display device 5B based on the display data supplied from the effect control microcomputer 120, and displays the demo screen # 1 on the display screen (step ST19).

  In this way, the demo screen # 1 shown in FIG. 21A can be displayed on the display screen of the second image display device 5B. Then, in the same manner as when displaying the demo screen # 1 on the display screen of the second image display device 5B, based on the display control data read from the demonstration display effect control pattern, the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 While performing various commands and processing, the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121 executes processing of image data in accordance with the display control command from the effect control microcomputer 120, whereby the demonstration screen # shown in FIG. 2 or the demo screen # 3 shown in FIG. 21C can be displayed on the display screen of the second image display device 5B. At this time, the demo screens # 1 to # 3 may be displayed on the display screen of the second image display device 5B in a predetermined order according to the setting of the effect control process timer determination value in the effect control pattern for demonstration display. . Alternatively, a plurality of types of demonstration display effect control patterns for displaying each of the demonstration screens # 1 to # 3 are prepared, and each time the demonstration screen display according to any one of the demonstration display effect control patterns ends. For example, by extracting a predetermined random number value updated by the random number circuit 113 or the like and referring to a demonstration screen determination table stored in advance in the ROM 115, one of a plurality of types of demonstration display effect control patterns is selected. By performing the demonstration screen display according to the selected demonstration display effect control pattern, any one of the demonstration screens # 1 to # 3 is randomly displayed on the display screen of the second image display device 5B. You may do it.

  44. In step S541 of FIG. 44, the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 determines the variable display pattern notified from the main board 11 by the variable display start command, the determined decorative pattern, the reach notice pattern, the jackpot notice pattern, and the like. An effect control pattern corresponding to is set. Thereafter, various commands and processes are performed in step S555 based on the display control data read from the effect control pattern in step S553 of FIG.

  FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific configuration example of a normal B4 (reach notice # 3) effect control pattern as an example of the effect control pattern set in step S541. Based on the normal B4 (reach notice # 3) effect control pattern as shown in FIG. 60, the CPU 131 transmits various display control commands from the input / output port 135 to the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121, and the VDP 141 performs effect control. The image data is processed in accordance with a display control command from the microcomputer 120 for use. FIG. 61 shows a reach notice # 3 display executed by the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 and the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121 based on the normal B4 (reach notice # 3) effect control pattern as shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process for. Note that, for example, in the effect control based on the effect control pattern set in step S541, such as the normal B4 (reach notice # 3) effect control pattern, in parallel with the process for executing the notice effect as shown in the flowchart of FIG. And the process for performing the variable display of a decoration symbol etc. in the 1st image display apparatus 5A is also performed.

  In the process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 61, first, the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 determines whether or not the display data development timing corresponding to the reach notice # 3 has come based on the effect control process timer value. (Step ST31). In the process of this step ST31, for example, the CPU 131 performs the reach notice process # 3 in the process of step S552 shown in FIG. 45, and the reach notice # 3 development determination based on the effect control process timer value and the normal B4 (reach notice # 3) effect control pattern shown in FIG. This corresponds to determining whether or not the production control process timer determination value # B1 specified as the value matches. At this time, if it is determined that it is not the display data development timing (step ST31; No), the processing of step ST31 is repeated and the process waits.

  For example, when the effect control process timer value matches the effect control process timer determination value # B1 specified in the normal B4 (reach notice # 3) effect control pattern shown in FIG. 61, for display corresponding to the reach notice # 3. It is determined that the data development timing is reached. When the display data development timing is reached (step ST31; Yes), for example, the CPU 131 is associated with the effect control process timer determination value # B1 in the normal B4 (reach notice # 3) effect control pattern shown in FIG. The display control data # B1 is read, and a command and processing for developing image data used for displaying the character image corresponding to the reach notice # 3 as shown in FIG. At this time, based on the display control data # B1, the CPU 131 displays data corresponding to the reach notice # 3 such as an automatic transfer command or a fixed address designation transfer command from the input / output port 135 to the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121. Is transmitted to the frame buffer memory 157 to transmit a display control command. For example, when the image data used for displaying the character image corresponding to the reach notice # 3 has not been transferred to the fixed address area 156A of the temporary storage memory 156 in the pre-transfer process, it corresponds to the display control data # B1. And send an automatic transfer command.

  In the VDP 141, when the automatic transfer command is received, the transfer control circuit 152 reads the image data specified from the data included in the automatic transfer command from the image data memory 142 and transfers it to the variable address area 156B of the temporary storage memory 156. Later, the drawing circuit 155 reads out the image data from the variable address area 156B and writes it into the second display data area 157B of the frame buffer memory 157, whereby the display data for reaching the reach notice is developed and stored in the frame buffer memory 157. (Step ST32).

  Thereafter, the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 determines whether or not it is the transfer timing for transferring the display data from the frame buffer memory 157 to the temporary storage memory 156 based on the effect control process timer value (step ST33). ). In step ST33, for example, CPU 131 determines reach transfer notice # 3 transfer based on the effect control process timer value shown in FIG. 45 and the normal B4 (reach notice # 3) effect control pattern shown in FIG. This corresponds to determining whether or not the production control process timer determination value # B2 specified as the value matches. At this time, if it is determined that it is not the timing for transferring the display data (step ST33; No), the processing of step ST33 is repeated and a standby is performed.

  For example, when the production control process timer value matches the production control process timer determination value # B2 specified in the normal B4 (reach notice # 3) production control pattern shown in FIG. 60, it is the transfer timing of the display data. Determined. When the display data transfer timing is thus reached (step ST33; Yes), for example, the CPU 131 is associated with the effect control process timer determination value # B2 in the normal B4 (reach notice # 3) effect control pattern shown in FIG. The display control data # B2 is read, and a command and processing for transferring the display data expanded and stored in the second display data area 157B of the frame buffer memory 157 in the VDP 141 to the temporary storage memory 156 are performed. At this time, the CPU 131 transmits a display data transfer command from the input / output port 135 to the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121 based on the display control data # B2.

  In the VDP 141, the display data specified by the transfer control circuit 152 from the data included in the display data transfer command is read from the second display data area 157B of the frame buffer memory 157 and stored in the variable address area 156B of the temporary storage memory 156. By writing, the display data corresponding to the reach notice # 3 is transferred from the frame buffer memory 157 to the temporary storage memory 156 (step ST34). The process in step ST34 corresponds to, for example, that the transfer control circuit 152 executes a display data transfer process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 51 in step S609 shown in FIG.

  Subsequently, the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 determines whether or not the read timing for reading and acquiring the display data from the temporary storage memory 156 of the VDP 141 is reached based on the effect control process timer value (step ST35). . In the process of step ST35, for example, the CPU 131 acquires the reach notice # 3 data using the effect control process timer value and the normal B4 (reach notice # 3) effect control pattern shown in FIG. 60 in the process of step S552 shown in FIG. This corresponds to determining whether or not the production control process timer determination value # B3 specified as the determination value matches. At this time, if it is determined that it is not the timing for reading the display data (step ST35; No), the processing of step ST35 is repeated and the process waits.

  For example, when the production control process timer value matches the production control process timer determination value # B3 specified in the normal B4 (reach notice # 3) production control pattern shown in FIG. Determined. When the display data read timing is reached in this way (step ST35; Yes), for example, the CPU 131 accesses the temporary storage memory 156 of the VDP 141 from the input / output port 135 to read the display data of reach notice # 3 for effect control. The data is transferred to and stored in the RAM 133 of the microcomputer 120 (step ST36).

  Further, the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 supplies the display data stored in the RAM 133 to the LCD drive circuit 125 based on the effect control process timer value to display the effect image corresponding to the reach notice # 3. It is determined whether or not the notice display timing has come (step ST37). In the process of step ST37, for example, the CPU 131 executes the process of step S552 shown in FIG. 45, and the reach notice # 3 display determination is performed using the effect control process timer value and the normal B4 (reach notice # 3) effect control pattern shown in FIG. This corresponds to determining whether or not the production control process timer determination value # B4 specified as the value matches. At this time, if it is determined that it is not the reach notice display timing (step ST37; No), the process of step ST37 is repeated and a standby is performed.

  For example, when the effect control process timer value matches the effect control process timer determination value # B4 specified in the normal B4 (reach notice # 3) effect control pattern shown in FIG. 60, it is determined that it is the reach notice display timing. The When the reach notice display timing is thus reached (step ST37; Yes), for example, the CPU 131 reads display data corresponding to the effect image of reach notice # 3 from the RAM 133 and supplies it to the LCD drive circuit 125 (step ST38). The LCD drive circuit 125 drives the second image display device 5B based on the display data supplied from the effect control microcomputer 120, and displays the effect image of reach notice # 3 on the display screen (step ST39). ).

  After executing the processing of step ST39, for example, the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 performs predetermined effect control designated by the effect control process timer value and the normal B4 (reach notice # 3) effect control pattern shown in FIG. By determining whether or not the process timer determination value matches, it is determined whether or not the reach notice end timing has come (step ST40). At this time, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of reach notice (step ST40; No), the process returns to step ST31. Thereby, the effect image of reach notice # 3 displayed on the display screen of the second image display device 5B can be updated in response to reaching the predetermined effect image update timing. If it is determined in step ST40 that it is the end timing of the reach notice, the process for displaying the reach notice # 3 shown in the flowchart of FIG. 61 is ended.

  In this way, the effect image of reach notice # 3 shown in FIG. 15C can be displayed on the display screen of the second image display device 5B. Further, for example, based on display control data read from the normal B2 (reach notice # 1) effect control pattern and the normal B3 (reach notice # 2) effect control pattern, the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 performs various commands and processes. When the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121 executes image data processing in accordance with the display control command from the effect control microcomputer 120, the effect image of reach notice # 1 shown in FIG. The effect image of reach notice # 2 shown in FIG. 15B can be displayed on the display screen of the second image display device 5B.

  FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific configuration example of a multi-A big hit (no reach notice, pattern # 1) effect control pattern as another example of the effect control pattern set in step S541 of FIG. . This multi-A jackpot (no reach notice, pattern # 1) effect control pattern is that the variable display pattern indicated in the variable display start command from the main board 11 is a multi-A variable display pattern, a special design or a decorative design 44 can be set in step S541 in FIG. 44 in accordance with the determination result that the variable display result is a big hit, the determination result that the reach notice is not executed, or the like. 62, the CPU 131 transmits various display control commands from the input / output port 135 to the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121. In the VDP 141, the display control from the effect control microcomputer 120 is performed. Processing of the image data according to the command is executed. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing processing for the multi-A pattern # 1 executed by the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 and the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121 based on the effect control pattern as shown in FIG. .

  In the process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 63, first, the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 transmits a predetermined display control command from the input / output port 135 to the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121. The variable display of decorative symbols is started on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” variable display sections in the display device 5A (step ST51). In the process of step ST51, for example, the CPU 131 performs settings for starting variable display of decorative symbols in the process of step S543 shown in FIG. 44, and the VDP 141 executes image data processing according to the settings. Corresponding to

  Thereafter, the reach effect is started in response to the fact that the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is reached (step ST52). The processing of this step ST52 is, for example, the effect control process timer determination value # C1 designated as the reach effect start determination value by the CPU 131 in step S552 of FIG. 45 and the effect control pattern shown in FIG. Is determined to match, the display control data # C1 associated with the production control process timer determination value # C1 is read, and a command or process corresponding to the read data is executed. In response to this, the VDP 141 executes image data processing. Thereby, on the display screen of the first image display device 5A, for example, a reach notification image for notifying that the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is reached is displayed, and the reach is an effective line. An effect image showing the reach line is displayed.

  Subsequently, the CPU 131 executes a command and processing for starting a multi-view in which the display screen of the first image display device 5A is divided into a plurality of display areas (step ST53). In addition, the CPU 131 executes a command and processing for starting playback and display of a moving image individually in a plurality of display areas arranged on the display screen of the first image display device 5A (step ST54). The processing in step ST53 and the processing in step ST54 are performed, for example, by the CPU 131 in step S552 in FIG. 45, and the effect control process timer designated as the multi-view setting determination value in the effect control pattern shown in FIG. When it is determined that the determination value # C2 matches, the display control data # C2 associated with the production control process timer determination value # C2 is read, and a command or process corresponding to the read data is executed. It corresponds. At this time, based on the display control data # C2, the multi-view setting command and the moving image display setting command are transmitted from the effect control microcomputer 120 to the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121. In the VDP 141, in response to the multi-view setting command, the enlargement ratio in the scaler circuit included in the display circuit 158 is adjusted, and from the display data having the size of the VGA mode (640 × 480 pixels), The enlargement ratio is set so that conversion to pixel data having an XGA mode size (1024 × 768 pixels) corresponding to the total number of pixels on the display screen is possible. In addition, the bus width of the data bus connected between the VDP 141 and the image data memory 142 is set to 32 bits as the second bus width, and the memory chips 142-1 to 142 included in the image data memory 142 are set. The chip select is set to CS # 1 so that the memory chip 142-3 storing the moving image data is selected as a reading target. In addition, in the VDP 141, in response to the moving image display setting command, the index table 250 is set so that two display areas for reproducing and displaying a moving image are arranged on the display screen of the first image display device 5A. In addition, setting of a writing position in the frame buffer memory 157 is performed.

  Thereafter, the CPU 131 determines whether or not the update timing of the moving image A1 has come based on the effect control process timer value (step ST55). Here, when the multi-A variable display pattern is the first pattern # 1, the moving image A1 is arranged on the display screen of the first image display device 5A, for example, as shown in FIG. 10B. Reproduced and displayed in the display area. The process of step ST55 is, for example, an effect control process timer designated as the moving image A1 development determination value by the CPU 131 in the process of step S552 shown in FIG. 45 and the effect control process timer value shown in FIG. This corresponds to determining whether or not the determination value # C3 matches. At this time, when it is determined that it is not the update timing of the moving image A1 (step ST55; No), the processing of step ST55 is repeated and a standby is performed.

  For example, when the effect control process timer value matches the effect control process timer determination value # C3 specified by the effect control pattern shown in FIG. 62, it is determined that it is the update timing of the moving image A1. When the update timing of the moving image A1 is reached (step ST55; Yes), for example, the CPU 131 reads display control data # C3 associated with the effect control process timer determination value # C3 in the effect control pattern shown in FIG. Commands and processing for decoding moving image data used for reproducing and displaying the moving image A1 are performed. At this time, the CPU 131 transmits a moving image decoding command from the input / output port 135 to the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121 based on the display control data # C3.

  In the VDP 141, the moving image data specified by the moving image decoder 154 from the data included in the moving image decoding command is decoded by one frame, and is specified by the index table 250 in the variable address area 156 B of the temporary storage memory 156. The area is written and stored (step ST56). At this time, for example, the decoded moving image data may be read from the variable address area 156B by the drawing circuit 155 and written into the first display data area 157A of the frame buffer memory 157. In the process of step ST56, for example, the moving picture decoder 154 executes the processes of steps S751 to S753 shown in FIG. 55 in response to a moving picture decoding command indicating decoding of moving picture data corresponding to the moving picture A1. It corresponds to.

  Subsequently, the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 determines whether or not the update timing of the moving image A2 has come based on the effect control process timer value (step ST57). Here, when the multi-A variable display pattern is the first pattern # 1, the moving image A2 is arranged on the display screen of the first image display device 5A, for example, as shown in FIG. 10B. Reproduced and displayed in the display area. The processing of this step ST57 is, for example, an effect control process timer designated as the moving image A2 development determination value by the CPU 131 in the process of step S552 shown in FIG. 45 and the effect control process timer value shown in FIG. This corresponds to determining whether or not the determination value # C4 matches. At this time, when it is determined that it is not the update timing of the moving image A2 (step ST57; No), the processing of step ST57 is repeated and a standby is performed.

  For example, when the effect control process timer value matches the effect control process timer determination value # C4 specified by the effect control pattern shown in FIG. 62, it is determined that it is the update timing of the moving image A2. When the update timing of the moving image A2 is reached (step ST57; Yes), for example, the CPU 131 reads out display control data # C4 associated with the effect control process timer determination value # C4 in the effect control pattern shown in FIG. A command or process for decoding moving image data used for reproducing and displaying the moving image A2 is performed. At this time, the CPU 131 transmits a moving image decoding command from the input / output port 135 to the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121 based on the display control data # C4.

  In the VDP 141, the moving image data specified by the moving image decoder 154 from the data included in the moving image decoding command is decoded by one frame, and is specified by the index table 250 in the variable address area 156 B of the temporary storage memory 156. The area is written and stored (step ST58). At this time, for example, the decoded moving image data may be read from the variable address area 156B by the drawing circuit 155 and written to the second display data area 157B of the frame buffer memory 157. In the process of step ST58, for example, the moving picture decoder 154 executes the processes of steps S751 to S753 shown in FIG. 55 in response to a moving picture decoding command indicating decoding of moving picture data corresponding to the moving picture A2. It corresponds to.

  After executing the processing of step ST58, for example, the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 matches the effect control process timer value with the predetermined effect control process timer determination value specified by the effect control pattern shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the moving image display end timing for ending reproduction display of the moving image has come (step ST59). At this time, if it is determined that it is not the moving image display end timing (step ST59; No), the process returns to step ST55. Accordingly, the display of the moving image A1 can be updated in response to reaching the predetermined moving image A1 update timing, and the moving image A2 can be updated in response to reaching the predetermined moving image A2 update timing. The display can be updated.

  Here, it is assumed that the refresh timing of the display image in the first image display device 5A is the timings T01 to T20 at equal intervals as shown in FIG. In this case, for example, in the effect control pattern shown in FIG. 62, the effect control process timer determination value that is the moving image A1 development determination value is updated at the refresh timings of timings T01, T03,. It is set to the production control process timer value that enables this. In addition, the effect control process timer determination value that becomes the moving image A2 development determination value is set to an effect control process timer value that enables the moving image A2 to be updated at the refresh timings of timings T02, T04,. . Accordingly, a plurality of types of display data created for each of a plurality of types of moving image data read from the image data memory 142 are framed in a predetermined order corresponding to the passage of the image frame period in the first image display device 5A. The buffer memory 157 can be written and stored. The image frame period is 1 at the next refresh timing after an image for one frame is displayed on the display screen of the display device at a predetermined refresh timing among a plurality of refresh timings that arrive at regular intervals. It is the length of time until an image for a frame is displayed (time interval between adjacent refresh timings).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 64B, the display data of the moving image A1 and the display data of the moving image A2 are alternately displayed in correspondence with the passage of the image frame period of the first image display device 5A. To the frame buffer memory 157. At this time, for example, a cycle in which the display data of the moving image A1 is written in the frame buffer memory 157 is a first writing cycle, and a cycle in which the display data of the moving image A2 is written in the frame buffer memory 157 is a second writing cycle. For example, both the first writing period and the second writing period have the same time length that is twice the image frame period in the first image display device 5A. Then, when the first writing period elapses corresponding to the elapse of the image frame period, the display data of the moving image A1 is written and stored in the frame buffer memory 157. Thereafter, when the second writing cycle elapses in the next image frame cycle after the first writing cycle elapses, the display data of the moving image A2 is written and stored in the frame buffer memory 157. Then, the display of the moving image A1 is updated at the refresh timing T01 shown in FIG. 64A, and the display of the moving image A2 is updated at the refresh timing T02, so that the image frame period in the first image display device 5A is updated. In comparison, the display of the moving image A1 and the moving image A2 is updated at a period twice as long.

  In this case, the moving image data corresponding to each of the moving image A1 and the moving image A2 has the number of frames corresponding to being updated at a period twice as long as the image frame period in the first image display device 5A. If it is. For example, when the image frame period of the first image display device 5A is 1/60 seconds, the moving image data corresponding to each of the moving images A1 and A2 is updated at a period of 1/30 seconds. It is only necessary to have the number of frames corresponding to. Therefore, the number of frames in the moving image data corresponding to each of the moving images A1 and A2 is updated in the same period as the image frame period of the first image display device 5A. It is sufficient to be 1/2 of this.

  If it is the moving image display end timing in step ST59 shown in FIG. 63 (step ST59; Yes), for example, the CPU 131 performs a command or process corresponding to a predetermined display control pattern read from the effect control pattern and VDP 141. However, by performing setting in accordance with the display control command from the production control microcomputer 120, the reproduction and display of the moving image by multiview is terminated (step ST60). Thereafter, in response to the elapse of the variable display time, a definite decorative symbol is derived and displayed on the display screen of the first image display device 5A (step ST61).

  In this way, for example, as shown in FIG. 10B, a plurality of types of moving images such as a moving image A1 and a moving image A2 are displayed in a display area obtained by dividing the display screen of the first image display device 5A into two. Individual playback and display can be performed. Also, in the effect control pattern provided corresponding to the case where the multi-B variable display pattern is the first pattern # 1, the effect control process timer determination value that is the moving image B1 expansion determination value is shown in FIG. Among the timings T01 to T20 as shown in FIG. 9), the effect control process timer value is set so that the moving image B1 can be updated at the refresh timings of timings T01, T04,. In this effect control pattern, an effect control process timer that makes it possible to update the moving image B2 at the refresh timings of timings T02, T05,. Set to value. Further, the effect control process timer determination value that becomes the moving image B3 development determination value is set to an effect control process timer value that allows the moving image B3 to be updated at the refresh timings of timings T03, T06,. . Thereby, the display data of the moving image B1, the display data of the moving image B2, and the display data of the moving image B3 are associated with the passage of the image frame period of the first image display device 5A. For example, the data is written in the frame buffer memory 157 in the order shown in FIG.

  At this time, if the cycle for writing the display data for the moving image B1 to the frame buffer memory 157 is the first writing cycle, and the cycle for writing the display data for the moving image B2 to the frame buffer memory 157 is the second writing cycle. Both the first writing cycle and the second writing cycle have the same time length that is three times the image frame cycle in the first image display device 5A. Then, when the first writing period elapses corresponding to the elapse of the image frame period, the display data of the moving image B1 is written and stored in the frame buffer memory 157. After that, when the second writing period elapses in the next frame period after the first writing period elapses, the display data of the moving image B2 is written and stored in the frame buffer memory 157. Thereby, the display of the moving image B1 is updated at the refresh timing T01 shown in FIG. 64A, the display of the moving image B2 is updated at the refresh timing T02, and the display of the moving image B3 is updated at the refresh timing T03. As described above, the display of each of the moving images B1 to B3 is updated at a period three times as long as the image frame period in the first image display device 5A.

  In this case, if the moving image data corresponding to each of the moving images B1 to B3 has the number of frames corresponding to being updated at a period three times as long as the image frame period in the first image display device 5A. Good. For example, when the image frame period of the first image display device 5A is 1/60 seconds, the moving image data corresponding to each of the moving images B1 to B3 is updated at a period of 1/20 second. What is necessary is just to have the number of frames. Therefore, the number of frames in the moving image data corresponding to each of the moving images B1 to B3 is 1 / of the number of frames in the moving image data corresponding to being updated at the same cycle as the image frame cycle of the first image display device 5A. 3 is sufficient.

  In the effect control pattern provided corresponding to the case where the multi-C variable display pattern is the first pattern # 1, the effect control process timer determination value serving as the moving image C1 expansion determination value is shown in FIG. Among such timings T01 to T20, the effect control process timer value is set so that the moving image C1 can be updated at the refresh timings of timings T01, T05,. In this effect control pattern, an effect control process timer that enables an update of the moving image C2 at the refresh timings of timings T02, T06,. And an effect control process timer determination value that enables the update of the moving image C3 at the refresh timings of timings T03, T07,..., T19. Set to value. Further, the effect control process timer determination value that becomes the moving image C4 development determination value is set to an effect control process timer value that enables the moving image C4 to be updated at the refresh timings of timings T04, T08,. . Thereby, the display data of the moving image C1, the display data of the moving image C2, the display data of the moving image C3, and the display data of the moving image C4 are converted into the image frame period of the first image display device 5A. Corresponding to the elapse of time, for example, data is written in the frame buffer memory 157 in the order as shown in FIG.

  At this time, if the cycle for writing the display data for the moving image C1 to the frame buffer memory 157 is the first writing cycle, and the cycle for writing the display data for the moving image C2 to the frame buffer memory 157 is the second writing cycle. Both the first writing cycle and the second writing cycle have the same time length that is four times the image frame cycle in the first image display device 5A. Then, when the first writing period elapses corresponding to the elapse of the image frame period, the display data of the moving image C1 is written and stored in the frame buffer memory 157. Thereafter, when the second writing cycle elapses in the next frame cycle after the first writing cycle elapses, the display data of the moving image C2 is written and stored in the frame buffer memory 157. Thereby, the display of the moving image C1 is updated at the refresh timing T01 shown in FIG. 64A, the display of the moving image C2 is updated at the refresh timing T02, and the display of the moving image C3 is updated at the refresh timing T03. At timing T04, the display of each of the moving images C1 to C4 is updated at a period four times the image frame period in the first image display device 5A, such as the display of the moving image C4 being updated. .

  In this case, if the moving image data corresponding to each of the moving images C1 to C4 has the number of frames corresponding to being updated at a period four times as long as the image frame period in the first image display device 5A. Good. For example, when the image frame period of the first image display device 5A is 1/60 seconds, the moving image data corresponding to each of the moving images C1 to C4 is updated at a period of 1/15 seconds. What is necessary is just to have the number of frames. Therefore, the number of frames in the moving image data corresponding to each of the moving images C1 to C4 is 1 / of the number of frames in the moving image data corresponding to being updated at the same cycle as the image frame cycle of the first image display device 5A. 4 is sufficient.

  As described above, when the variable display pattern of multi A to multi C is the first pattern # 1, for example, the total number of moving images (number of streams) reproduced and displayed on the display screen of the first image display device 5A. ), Among the plurality of types of display data created corresponding to the plurality of types of moving image data, the first moving image data (for example, the moving image A1 and the moving image in each of the multi-A, multi-B, and multi-C) A first writing period, which is a period for writing display data corresponding to the image B1, moving image data of the moving image C1, etc., to the frame buffer memory 157; and second moving image data (for example, multi-A, multi-B, multi-C). The second writing, which is a cycle for writing display data corresponding to the moving image A2, moving image B2, moving image data of the moving image C2, etc. in the frame buffer memory 157 Period and are both will have a same time length is an integer multiple of the image frame period in the first image display device 5A.

  FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific configuration example of a multi-A big hit (no reach notice, pattern # 2) effect control pattern as another example of the effect control pattern set in step S541 of FIG. . This multi-A jackpot (no reach notice, pattern # 2) effect control pattern is also variably started from the main board 11 in the same manner as the multi-A jackpot (no reach notice, pattern # 1) effect control pattern shown in FIG. The variable display pattern shown in the command corresponds to the multi-A variable display pattern, the determination result that the variable display result of special symbols and decorations is a big hit, the determination result that the reach notice is not executed, etc. Thus, it can be set in step S541 in FIG. As an example, in step S541, an effect control pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 132 or the like based on a random number value for effect control pattern determination updated by hardware such as the random number circuit 134 or by software executed by the CPU 131. It is only necessary to determine which one of the effect control patterns shown in FIG. 62 and the effect control pattern shown in FIG.

  65, the CPU 131 transmits various display control commands from the input / output port 135 to the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121. In the VDP 141, the display control from the effect control microcomputer 120 is performed. Processing of the image data according to the command is executed. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing processing for the multi-A pattern # 2 executed by the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 and the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121 based on the effect control pattern as shown in FIG. .

  In the process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 66, first, the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 transmits a predetermined display control command from the input / output port 135 to the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121. The variable display of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the display device 5A starts the variable display of decorative symbols (step ST71). In the process of step ST71, for example, the CPU 131 performs settings for starting variable display of decorative symbols in the process of step S543 shown in FIG. 44, and the VDP 141 executes image data processing in accordance with the settings. Corresponding to

  Thereafter, the reach effect is started in response to the fact that the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is reached (step ST72). The processing of this step ST72 is, for example, an effect control process timer determination value # D1 designated as a reach effect start determination value by the CPU 131 in step S552 of FIG. 45 and an effect control pattern shown in FIG. Is determined to match, the display control data # D1 associated with the production control process timer determination value # D1 is read, and a command or process corresponding to the read data is executed, or the command In response to this, the VDP 141 executes image data processing. Thereby, on the display screen of the first image display device 5A, for example, a reach notification image for notifying that the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is reached is displayed, and the reach is an effective line. An effect image showing the reach line is displayed.

  Subsequently, the CPU 131 executes a command and a process for starting a multi-view for reproducing and displaying a plurality of different types of moving images on the display screens of the first image display device 5A and the second image display device 5B (steps). ST73). In addition, the CPU 131 executes a command and processing for individually starting playback and display of moving images in a plurality of display areas arranged on the display screens of the first image display device 5A and the second image display device 5B. (Step ST74). The processing in step ST73 and the processing in step ST74 are performed by, for example, the effect control process timer designated by the CPU 131 as the multi-view setting determination value in the effect control process timer value in step S552 of FIG. 45 and the effect control pattern shown in FIG. When it is determined that the determination value # D2 matches, the display control data # D2 associated with the production control process timer determination value # D2 is read, and a command or process corresponding to the read data is executed. It corresponds. At this time, based on the display control data # D2, a multi-view setting command and a moving image display setting command are transmitted from the effect control microcomputer 120 to the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121. In the VDP 141, in response to the multi-view setting command, the enlargement ratio in the scaler circuit included in the display circuit 158 is adjusted, and from the display data having the size of the VGA mode (640 × 480 pixels), The enlargement ratio is set so that conversion to pixel data having an XGA mode size (1024 × 768 pixels) corresponding to the total number of pixels on the display screen is possible. In addition, the bus width of the data bus connected between the VDP 141 and the image data memory 142 is set to 32 bits as the second bus width, and the memory chips 142-1 to 142 included in the image data memory 142 are set. The chip select is set to CS # 1 so that the memory chip 142-3 storing the moving image data is selected as a reading target. In addition, in the VDP 141, in response to the moving image display setting command, a display area for reproducing and displaying a moving image on the display screen of the first image display device 5A and the display screen of the second image display device 5B is 1 The setting of the index table 250 and the setting of the writing position in the frame buffer memory 157 are performed so that a total of two are arranged.

  Thereafter, the CPU 131 determines whether or not the update timing of the moving image A1 has come based on the effect control process timer value (step ST75). Here, when the multi-A variable display pattern is the second pattern # 2, the moving image A1 is arranged on the display screen of the first image display device 5A, for example, as shown in FIG. Reproduced and displayed in the display area. The processing of this step ST75 is, for example, the effect control process timer designated as the moving image A1 development determination value by the CPU 131 in the process of step S552 shown in FIG. 45 and the effect control process timer value shown in FIG. This corresponds to determining whether or not the determination value # D3 matches.

  For example, when the effect control process timer value matches the effect control process timer determination value # D3 specified by the effect control pattern shown in FIG. 65, it is determined that it is the update timing of the moving image A1. When the update timing of the moving image A1 is thus reached (step ST75; Yes), for example, the CPU 131 reads out display control data # D3 associated with the effect control process timer determination value # D3 in the effect control pattern shown in FIG. Commands and processing for decoding moving image data used for reproducing and displaying the moving image A1 are performed. At this time, the CPU 131 transmits a moving image decoding command from the input / output port 135 to the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121 based on the display control data # D3.

  In the VDP 141, the moving image data specified by the moving image decoder 154 from the data included in the moving image decoding command is decoded by one frame, and is specified by the index table 250 in the variable address area 156 B of the temporary storage memory 156. The area is written and stored (step ST76). At this time, for example, the decoded moving image data may be read from the variable address area 156B by the drawing circuit 155 and written into the first display data area 157A of the frame buffer memory 157. In the process of step ST76, for example, the moving picture decoder 154 executes the processes of steps S751 to S753 shown in FIG. 55 in response to a moving picture decoding command indicating decoding of moving picture data corresponding to the moving picture A1. It corresponds to.

  When it is determined in step ST75 that it is not the update timing of the moving image A1 (step ST75; No), after executing the process of step ST76, the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 sets the effect control process timer value. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the update timing of the moving image A2 has come (step ST77). Here, when the multi-A variable display pattern is the second pattern # 2, the moving image A2 is arranged on the display screen of the second image display device 5B, for example, as shown in FIG. Reproduced and displayed in the display area. The process of step ST77 is, for example, an effect control process timer designated as the moving image A2 development determination value by the CPU 131 in the process of step S552 shown in FIG. 45 and the effect control process timer value shown in FIG. This corresponds to determining whether or not the determination value # D4 matches.

  For example, when the effect control process timer value matches the effect control process timer determination value # D4 specified by the effect control pattern shown in FIG. 65, it is determined that it is the update timing of the moving image A2. When the update timing of the moving image A2 is reached in this way (step ST77; Yes), for example, the CPU 131 reads display control data # D4 associated with the effect control process timer determination value # D4 in the effect control pattern shown in FIG. A command or process for decoding moving image data used for reproducing and displaying the moving image A2 is performed. At this time, the CPU 131 transmits a moving image decoding command from the input / output port 135 to the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121 based on the display control data # D4.

  In the VDP 141, the moving image data specified by the moving image decoder 154 from the data included in the moving image decoding command is decoded by one frame, and is specified by the index table 250 in the variable address area 156 B of the temporary storage memory 156 The area is written and stored (step ST78). At this time, for example, the decoded moving image data may be read from the variable address area 156B by the drawing circuit 155 and written to the second display data area 157B of the frame buffer memory 157. In the process of step ST78, for example, the moving picture decoder 154 executes the processes of steps S751 to S753 shown in FIG. 55 in response to a moving picture decoding command indicating decoding of moving picture data corresponding to the moving picture A2. It corresponds to.

  When it is determined in step ST77 that it is not the update timing of the moving image A2 (step ST77; No), after executing the process of step ST78, the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 sets the effect control process timer value. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the transfer timing for transferring the display data of the moving image A2 from the frame buffer memory 157 to the temporary storage memory 156 is reached (step ST79). The processing of this step ST79 is, for example, an effect control process timer designated as the moving image A2 transfer determination value by the CPU 131 in the process of step S552 shown in FIG. 45 and the effect control process timer value shown in FIG. This corresponds to determining whether or not the determination value # D5 matches.

  For example, when the effect control process timer value matches the effect control process timer determination value # D5 specified by the effect control pattern shown in FIG. 65, it is determined that the display data transfer timing is reached. When the display data transfer timing is thus reached (step ST79; Yes), for example, the CPU 131 reads display control data # D5 associated with the effect control process timer determination value # D5 in the effect control pattern shown in FIG. The VDP 141 performs instructions and processing for transferring the display data expanded and stored in the second display data area 157B of the frame buffer memory 157 to the temporary storage memory 156. At this time, the CPU 131 transmits a display data transfer command from the input / output port 135 to the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121 based on the display control data # D5.

  In the VDP 141, the display data specified by the transfer control circuit 152 from the data included in the display data transfer command is read from the second display data area 157B of the frame buffer memory 157 and stored in the variable address area 156B of the temporary storage memory 156. By writing, the display data of the moving image A2 is transferred from the frame buffer memory 157 to the temporary storage memory 156 (step ST80). The processing in step ST80 corresponds to, for example, that the transfer control circuit 152 executes display data transfer processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 51 in step S609 shown in FIG.

  If it is not the timing for transferring the display data in step ST79 (step ST79; No), after executing the process of step ST80, the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 performs display based on the effect control process timer value. It is determined whether or not it is time to read data from the temporary storage memory 156 of the VDP 141 (step ST81). The process of this step ST81 is, for example, the effect control process designated as the moving image A2 data acquisition determination value by the CPU 131 in the process of step S552 shown in FIG. 45 by the effect control process timer value and the effect control pattern shown in FIG. This corresponds to determining whether or not the timer determination value # D6 matches.

  For example, when the effect control process timer value matches the effect control process timer determination value # D6 specified by the effect control pattern shown in FIG. 65, it is determined that the display data reading timing is reached. When the display data read timing is reached in this way (step ST81; Yes), for example, the CPU 131 accesses the temporary storage memory 156 of the VDP 141 from the input / output port 135, reads the display data for the moving image A2, and displays the effect control micro data. The data is transferred and stored in the RAM 133 of the computer 120 (step ST82).

  If it is not the timing for reading the display data in step ST81 (step ST81; No), after executing the process of step ST82, the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 stores it in the RAM 133 based on the effect control process timer value. It is determined whether the display update timing for supplying the stored display data to the LCD drive circuit 125 to update the display of the moving image A2 has come (step ST83). The process of step ST83 is, for example, an effect control process designated as the moving image A2 display update determination value by the CPU 131 in the process of step S552 shown in FIG. 45 and the effect control process timer value and the effect control pattern shown in FIG. This corresponds to determining whether or not the timer determination value # D7 matches.

  For example, when the effect control process timer value matches the effect control process timer determination value # D7 specified by the effect control pattern shown in FIG. 65, it is determined that it is the display update timing. When the display update timing is thus reached (step ST83; Yes), for example, the CPU 131 reads display data corresponding to the moving image A2 from the RAM 133 and supplies it to the LCD drive circuit 125 (step ST84). The LCD drive circuit 125 drives the second image display device 5B based on the display data supplied from the effect control microcomputer 120, and displays the moving image A2 on the display screen (step ST85).

  If it is not the display update timing in step ST83 (step ST83; No), or after executing the process of step ST85, for example, the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 displays the effect control process timer value and the effect shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it is the moving image display end timing for ending the reproduction display of the moving image by determining whether or not a predetermined production control process timer determination value specified by the control pattern matches ( Step ST86). At this time, if it is determined that it is not the moving image display end timing (step ST86; No), the processing returns to step ST75. Thereby, it is possible to update the display of the moving image A1 displayed as the first effect image on the display screen of the first image display device 5A in response to reaching the predetermined moving image A1 update timing. At the same time, the display of the moving image A2 displayed as the second effect image on the display screen of the second image display device 5B can be updated in response to reaching the predetermined moving image A2 update timing.

  Here, it is assumed that the refresh timings of the display images in the first image display device 5A and the second image display device 5B are timings T01 to T20 as shown in FIG. In this case, if there is a sufficient margin in the processing speed of the CPU 131 of the production control microcomputer 120 and the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121, for example, the production control that becomes the moving image A1 development determination value in the production control pattern shown in FIG. The process timer determination value is set to an effect control process timer value at which the moving image A1 can be updated at the refresh timings of timings T01, T03,. In addition, the effect control process timer determination value that becomes the moving image A2 development determination value is set to an effect control process timer value that enables the moving image A2 to be updated at the refresh timings of timings T02, T04,. . As a result, a plurality of types of display created for each of a plurality of types of moving image data read from the image data memory 142 in correspondence with the passage of the image frame period in the first image display device 5A and the second image display device 5B. Data can be written and stored in the first display data area 157A and the second display data area 157B of the frame buffer memory 157 in a predetermined order. For example, as shown in FIG. 64B, the display data of the moving image A1 and the display data of the moving image A2 are alternately displayed in correspondence with the passage of the image frame period of the first image display device 5A. To the frame buffer memory 157.

  At this time, for example, the cycle for writing the display data of the moving image A1 in the first display data area 157A of the frame buffer memory 157 is set as the first writing cycle, and the display data of the moving image A2 is set in the second buffer buffer 157. If the period of writing to the display data area 157B is the second writing period, both the first writing period and the second writing period are image frame periods in the first image display device 5A and the second image display device 5B. Have the same length of time. When the first writing period has elapsed corresponding to the elapse of the image frame period, the display data of the moving image A1 is written and stored in the first display data area 157A of the frame buffer memory 157. Thereafter, when the second writing cycle elapses in the next image frame cycle after the first writing cycle elapses, the display data of the moving image A2 is stored in the second display data area 157B of the frame buffer memory 157. Write and store. More generally, when the variable display pattern of multi-A to multi-C is the second pattern # 2, it is reproduced and displayed on the display screens of the first image display device 5A and the second image display device 5B, for example. The first moving image data (for example, multi-A, multi-B, multi-C) among a plurality of types of display data created corresponding to a plurality of types of moving image data corresponding to the total number of moving images (number of streams). The first writing cycle, which is a cycle for writing display data corresponding to the moving image A1, moving image B1, moving image data of the moving image C1, etc. in the frame buffer memory 157, and second moving image data (for example, The display data corresponding to the moving image A2, moving image B2, moving image C2, etc. in the multi A, multi B, and multi C is written in the frame buffer memory 157. A second write cycle is a cycle in which writing are both will have a same time length is an integer multiple of the image frame period in the first image display apparatus 5A and the second image display device 5B. Here, it is assumed that the image frame period has the same time length in the first image display device 5A and the second image display device 5B.

  Thus, the display data of the moving image A1 is written into the first display data area 157A of the frame buffer memory 157, so that the moving image A1 can be displayed on the display screen of the first image display device 5A. On the other hand, the display data of the moving image A2 is written in the second display data area 157B of the frame buffer memory 157, so that the moving image A2 can be displayed on the display screen of the second image display device 5B. Here, the display data written in the second display data area 157B is transferred to the temporary storage memory 156 in step ST80 and transferred to the RAM 133 of the effect control microcomputer 120 in step ST82. In step ST84, it is read from the RAM 133 by the CPU 131 and supplied to the LCD drive circuit 125, and is used to display the moving image A2 on the display screen of the second image display device 5B in step ST85. The By processing the moving image data in this way, the display of the moving image A1 is updated at the refresh timing T01 shown in FIG. 64A, and the display of the moving image A2 is updated at the refresh timing T02. The display of the moving image A1 and the moving image A2 is updated at a period twice that of the image frame period in the first image display device 5A and the second image display device 5B.

  In this case, the moving image data corresponding to each of the moving image A1 and the moving image A2 is updated at a period twice that of the image frame period in the first image display device 5A and the second image display device 5B. It is sufficient if it has a corresponding number of frames. For example, when the image frame period of the first image display device 5A and the second image display device 5B is 1/60 seconds, the moving image data corresponding to each of the moving images A1 and A2 is 1/30 seconds. It suffices to have the number of frames corresponding to the update in the cycle. For this reason, the number of frames in the moving image data corresponding to each of the moving image A1 and the moving image A2 is updated at the same cycle as the image frame cycle of the first image display device 5A or the second image display device 5B. The number of frames in the moving image data may be ½.

  If it is the moving image display end timing in step ST86 shown in FIG. 66 (step ST86; Yes), for example, the CPU 131 performs a command or process corresponding to a predetermined display control pattern read from the effect control pattern, and VDP 141. However, by performing setting in accordance with the display control command from the production control microcomputer 120, the reproduction and display of the moving image by multiview is terminated (step ST87). Thereafter, in response to the lapse of the variable display time, the fixed decorative design is derived and displayed on the display screen of the first image display device 5A (step ST88). In this manner, for example, as shown in FIG. 10C, the moving image A1 and the moving image are displayed in the display areas arranged one by one on the display screens of the first image display device 5A and the second image display device 5B. A plurality of types of moving images such as A2 can be individually reproduced and displayed.

  FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific configuration example of a super jackpot (no reach notice, no jackpot notice) effect control pattern as another example of the effect control pattern set in step S541 of FIG. In this super jackpot (no reach notice, no jackpot notice) effect control pattern, the variable display pattern shown in the variable display start command from the main board 11 is a super variable display pattern, and special symbols and decorative designs are variable. Corresponding to the determination result that the display result is a big hit, the decision result that the reach notice is not executed, the decision result that the big notice is not executed, and the like can be set in step S541 in FIG.

  67, the CPU 131 causes various display control commands to be transmitted from the input / output port 135 to the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121. In the VDP 141, the display control from the effect control microcomputer 120 is performed. Processing of the image data according to the command is executed. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing a process for partial enlargement display executed by the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 and the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121 based on the effect control pattern as shown in FIG.

  In the process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 68, first, the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 determines whether or not the partial enlarged display start timing has come based on the effect control process timer value (step ST101). The process of this step ST101 is, for example, an effect control process timer designated as the partial enlargement display start determination value by the CPU 131 in the process of step S552 shown in FIG. 45 and the effect control process timer value shown in FIG. This corresponds to determining whether or not the determination value # E1 matches. Here, the partial enlarged display start determination value is, for example, a special design or a decorative design such as a timing at which a predetermined reach effect display is started after reaching the variable display mode of the decorative design corresponding to the super variable display pattern. The production control process timer value corresponding to the timing at which the predetermined condition for starting the partial enlarged display is satisfied before the fixed special symbol or the fixed decorative symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed after the variable display is started. As long as it shows. At this time, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the partial enlarged display (step ST101; No), the processing of step ST101 is repeated and a standby is performed.

  For example, when the effect control process timer value matches the effect control process timer determination value # E1 specified by the effect control pattern shown in FIG. 67, it is determined that it is the start timing of the partial enlarged display. When the partial enlarged display start timing is reached in this way (step ST101; Yes), for example, the CPU 131 reads display control data # E1 associated with the effect control process timer determination value # E1 in the effect control pattern shown in FIG. A command or a process for starting a partial enlarged display in which a part of the effect image is enlarged and displayed on the display screen of the first image display device 5A is performed (step ST102). At this time, the CPU 131 transmits an enlarged display setting command or the like from the input / output port 135 to the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121 based on the display control data # E1.

  When the VDP 141 receives an enlarged display setting command, the VDP 141 adjusts the enlargement ratio in the scaler circuit included in the display circuit 158, and displays the first image display device 5A from the display data having the size of the SVGA mode (800 × 600 pixels). The enlargement ratio is set so that conversion into pixel data having an XGA mode size (1024 × 768 pixels) corresponding to the total number of pixels on the display screen of the above is possible. The bus width of the data bus connected between the VDP 141 and the image data memory 142 is set to 64 bits as the first bus width, and the memory chips 142-1 to 142-142 included in the image data memory 142 are set. The chip select setting is CS # 0 so that the memory chips 142-1 and 142-2 that store the sprite image data among -3 are selected as reading targets.

  Thereafter, whether or not the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 has reached the partial expansion display data expansion timing for expanding the display data for performing partial expansion in the frame buffer memory 157 based on the effect control process timer value. Determination is made (step ST103). In the process of step ST103, for example, the CPU 131 performs the effect control process timer determination designated as the enlarged image development determination value by the effect control process timer value and the effect control pattern shown in FIG. 67 in the process of step S552 shown in FIG. This corresponds to determining whether or not the value # E2 matches.

  For example, when the effect control process timer value matches the effect control process timer determination value # E2 specified in the effect control pattern shown in FIG. 67, it is determined that the display data development timing for partial enlargement is reached. The When the display data development timing is reached (step ST103; Yes), for example, the CPU 131 reads display control data # E2 associated with the effect control process timer determination value # E2 in the effect control pattern shown in FIG. Commands and processing for expanding image data used for partial enlarged display are performed. At this time, based on the display control data # E2, the CPU 131 sends display data for partial enlargement display such as an automatic transfer command and a fixed address designation transfer command from the input / output port 135 to the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121. A display control command for writing to the frame buffer memory 157 is transmitted. For example, if the image data corresponding to the effect image for partial enlarged display has not been transferred to the fixed address area 156A of the temporary storage memory 156 in the advance transfer process, an automatic transfer command is transmitted according to the display control data # E2. That's fine.

  In the VDP 141, when the automatic transfer command is received, the transfer control circuit 152 reads the image data specified from the data included in the automatic transfer command from the image data memory 142 and transfers it to the variable address area 156B of the temporary storage memory 156. Thereafter, the drawing circuit 155 reads out the image data from the variable address area 156B and writes it in the frame buffer memory 157, whereby display data for performing partial enlarged display is developed and stored in the frame buffer memory 157 (step ST104). . The image data read from the image data memory 142 at this time is, for example, sprite image display image data # 01-01 to # 01- corresponding to the SVGA mode among the sprite image data stored in the main sprite image data area 142. Any of XX may be used. The display data expanded and stored in the frame buffer memory 157 in this manner is read out by the display circuit 158 in correspondence with the refresh timing of the display image in the first image display device 5A, for example, and the size of the SVGA mode (800 × 600 pixels). Is converted into pixel data having the size of the XGA mode (1024 × 768 pixels). By outputting the pixel data as gradation data to the first image display device 5A, a partially enlarged effect image can be displayed on the display screen of the first image display device 5A.

  After executing the process of step ST104, for example, the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 matches the effect control process timer value with the predetermined effect control process timer determination value specified by the effect control pattern shown in FIG. For example, it is determined whether or not the partial enlarged display end timing for ending the partial enlarged display is reached (step ST105). When it is determined in step ST103 that it is not the display data expansion timing (step ST103; No), or in step ST105, it is determined that it is not the partial enlarged display end timing (step ST105; No). The process returns to step ST103. Thereby, in response to reaching the predetermined partial enlarged image update timing, it is possible to update the effect image that is displayed in a partially enlarged manner on the display screen of the first image display device 5A. If it is determined in step ST105 that the partial enlarged display end timing is reached (step ST105; Yes), for example, the CPU 131 performs a command or process corresponding to a predetermined display control pattern read from the effect control pattern, and VDP 141. Makes settings for ending the display of the partially enlarged effect image, such as setting according to the display control command from the effect control microcomputer 120 (step ST106).

  In this way, for example, a part of the predetermined effect image can be enlarged and displayed on the display screen of the first image display device 5A. At this time, enlargement in the scaler circuit included in the display circuit 158 is performed so that the display data having the SVGA mode size (800 × 600 pixels) is converted into pixel data having the XGA mode size (1024 × 768 pixels). In addition to setting the rate, the bus width of the data bus connected to the image data memory 142 is set to 64 bits, which is the first bus width. With these settings, it is possible to display fine effect images compared to the case of using image data compatible with the VGA mode, and the coarseness of the image quality is not noticeable even when the effect images are partially enlarged. Can be. Further, for example, when a part of the effect image is enlarged and displayed using a part of the image data corresponding to the predetermined effect image, for example, a part of the predetermined character image is displayed in close-up, The enlargement ratio of the effect image is larger than when the entire effect image is displayed. Therefore, when a part of the effect image is enlarged and displayed using a part of the image data in this way, in the process of step ST102, for example, the SVGA mode and the VGA mode are determined based on the determination that the enlargement ratio of the effect image is increased. As in the SVGA mode, the effect that the effect image corresponding to the image data having a large number of pixels is displayed on the first image display device 5A or the like is determined. In response to this determination result, for example, an enlarged display setting command is transmitted from the input / output port 135 to the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121. In this case, the VDP 141 reads image data corresponding to the SVGA mode with a large number of pixels from the image data memory 142 and uses it to display the effect image on the first image display device 5A. When a part of the effect image is enlarged and displayed using a part of the image data, for example, the drawing circuit 155 uses only a part of the image data corresponding to the part of the effect image to be displayed. Display data may be created and expanded and stored in the frame buffer memory 157. Thereafter, the display circuit 158 enlarges the display data read from the frame buffer memory 157 at the set enlargement ratio, whereby a part of the effect image can be enlarged and displayed.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the above embodiment, the transfer control circuit 152 executes the display data transfer process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 51 in step S609 shown in FIG. The display data stored in the second display data area 157B of the buffer memory 157 is transferred to the variable address area 156B of the temporary storage memory 156. Then, the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 changes the temporary storage memory 156 by, for example, the process of step ST16 shown in FIG. 58, the process of step ST36 shown in FIG. 61, the process of step ST82 shown in FIG. The display data stored in the address area 156B is read out and temporarily stored in the RAM 133. Thereafter, for example, the display data stored in the RAM 133 is supplied to the LCD drive circuit 125 by the process of step ST18 shown in FIG. 58, the process of step ST38 shown in FIG. 61, the process of step ST84 shown in FIG. . Thereby, the LCD drive circuit 125 displays the display screen of the second image display device 5B in the process of step ST19 shown in FIG. 58, the process of step ST39 shown in FIG. 61, the process of step ST85 shown in FIG. The effect image is displayed on the top. Thus, the display for displaying the effect image on the display screen of the second image display device 5B in the VDP 141 that creates display data for displaying the effect image on the display screen of the first image display device 5A. Since the production data is created and the production image can be displayed on the display screen of the second image display device 5B by the CPU 131 of the production control microcomputer 120, the production image is displayed on the second image display device 5B. There is no need to provide a dedicated VDP or microcomputer, and an increase in manufacturing cost can be prevented.

  Demonstration images # 1 to # 3 as shown in FIGS. 21A to 21C are prepared as effect images displayed on the display screen of the second image display device 5B, for example. Further, for example, an effect image of jackpot notice # 2 made up of character information for notifying reach reliability as shown in FIG. 16B is also prepared. In this way, by displaying on the second image display device 5B an effect image for informing predetermined information related to the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, various information is provided to a player who is not familiar with the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Can be provided to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, in the first image display device 5A, for example, the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed on each of the variable display portions “left”, “middle”, and “right”, while the variable display of the decorative symbols is started. In a predetermined period of time until the fixed decorative symbol is derived and displayed, for example, the effect images of reach notices # 1 to # 3 shown in FIGS. 15A to 15B, and FIGS. 16A to 16C are shown. The effect images of the jackpot notices # 1 to # 3 are displayed on the display screen of the second image display device 5B. As in the effect images of the reach notices # 1 to # 3, the effect of changing the decorative pattern as in the effect images of the advance notice images # 1 to # 3 and the notice effect image in which the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is informed to reach will be reached. Causing the second image display device 5B to display an effect image for notifying that the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode, such as a preview effect image for notifying that the display result is a definite decorative symbol of the jackpot combination. Thus, it is possible to enhance the player's expectation that the decorative display variable display mode becomes a predetermined display mode, and improve the interest of the game.

  The CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 and the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121 execute the processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 63 and the processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 66, for example, to thereby display the first image display device 5A and the second image display. Corresponding to the passage of the image frame period in the apparatus 5B, a plurality of types of display data created for each moving image data read from the image data memory 142 are written and stored in the frame buffer memory 157 in a predetermined order. Different types of moving images can be displayed for each of a plurality of display areas provided on the display screen of the single image display device 5A or the second image display device 5B. As a result, every time the image frame period in the first image display device 5A or the second image display device 5B elapses, all the plural types of display data created for each of the plural types of moving image data are stored in the frame buffer memory 157. Compared to writing and storing, it is possible to reduce the processing load required to display a moving image, and to prevent a lack of effects for displaying a moving image. Further, since the moving image data for displaying a plurality of types of moving images may be prepared with the number of frames corresponding to the timing at which the display data is created, the data capacity can be reduced.

  For example, according to the process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 63 and the process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 66, the reach effect display that reproduces and displays a plurality of types of moving images in response to the fact that the variable display mode of the decorative symbols is reached. Will be started. In this way, when a predetermined display condition is established in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a plurality of types of moving images are reproduced and displayed, thereby enhancing the presentation effect by reproducing and displaying the moving images, The interest of the game can be improved. In addition, variable display can be performed by making the predetermined display condition correspond to the fact that the variable display mode of the special symbol or the decorative design has become the predetermined display mode, for example, the variable display mode of the decorative design has reached reach. It is possible to increase the player's expectation for the game content in the pachinko gaming machine 1 such that the result is a big hit and is controlled to the big hit gaming state, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  According to the process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 66, in the process of step ST80, the display data of the moving image A2 is transferred from the second display data area 157B of the frame buffer memory 157 to the variable address area 156B of the temporary storage memory 156. To do. In the process of step ST 82, the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 reads the display data stored in the variable address area 156 B of the temporary storage memory 156 and temporarily stores it in the RAM 133. Thereafter, display data stored in the RAM 133 is supplied to the LCD drive circuit 125 in the process of step ST84. Thereby, the LCD drive circuit 125 displays the moving image A2 on the display screen of the second image display device 5B in the process of step ST85. In this way, in the VDP 141 that creates display data for displaying a moving image on the display screen of the first image display device 5A, the moving image is displayed on the display screen of the second image display device 5B. Since the display data is generated and the moving image can be displayed on the display screen of the second image display device 5B by the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120, the moving image is displayed on the second image display device 5B. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated VDP or microcomputer for the battery, and an increase in manufacturing cost can be prevented.

  In the main sprite image data area 142A of the image data memory 142, the image data corresponding to the number of pixels smaller than the number of pixels in the XGA mode corresponding to the total number of pixels on the display screen of the first image display device 5A is stored in the SVGA mode. Corresponding sprite image display image data # 01-01 to # 01-XX and sprite image display image data # 02-01 to # 02-XX corresponding to the VGA mode are stored. For example, when a predetermined image switching condition is established corresponding to the progress of the game, such as when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes a probabilistic gaming state, the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120, for example, The process in step S502 shown in FIG. 43 is executed to cause the input / output port 135 to transmit a probability change start display setting command to the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121, and the VDP 141 performs setting corresponding to the probability change start display setting command. As a result, the setting of the enlargement ratio in the scaler circuit of the display circuit 158 and the setting relating to the number of pixels of the image data to be used are changed. As a result, the data capacity is reduced as compared with the case where image data having the same number of pixels as the total number of pixels on the display screen of the first image display device 5A is stored in the image data memory 142 and used to display the effect image. The storage capacity in the image data memory 142 can be reduced. Further, for example, the data capacity of the display data written in the frame buffer memory 157 by the drawing circuit 155 of the VDP 141 is smaller in the display data corresponding to the SVGA mode or the VGA mode than the display data corresponding to the XGA mode, for example. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in processing load for creating display data. And according to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by changing the setting of the enlargement ratio and the setting of the number of pixels of the image data to be used when a predetermined image switching condition such as the probability changing gaming state is satisfied, for example. Thus, an effect image can be displayed with an appropriate enlargement ratio and image data, and the effect of the image display can be enhanced to improve the interest of the game.

  For example, in the processing of step S502 and step S505 shown in FIG. The command is transmitted, and the VDP 141 performs setting corresponding to the probability change start display setting command and the probability change end display setting command. At this time, the bus width of the data bus connected to the image data memory 142 is set to 64 bits, which is the first bus width. On the other hand, in the process of step ST53 shown in FIG. 63 and the process of step ST73 shown in FIG. A setting command is transmitted, and setting corresponding to the multi-view setting is performed by the VDP 141. At this time, the bus width of the data bus connected to the image data memory 142 is set to 32 bits as the second bus width.

  As described above, when the effect image is displayed on the display screen of the first image display device 5A or the second image display device 5B using the sprite image data, the sprite image data is read out from the image data memory 142. The bus width is assumed to be 64 bits predetermined as the first bus width. On the other hand, when the moving image data is used to reproduce and display a moving image as an effect image on the display screen of the first image display device 5A or the second image display device 5B, the moving image data is read from the image data memory 142. The bus width at the time of reading is set to 32 bits predetermined as a second bus width narrower than the first bus width (having a smaller number of bits). Here, for example, when display data is created using sprite image data, the processing speed of the VDP 141 is higher than that of moving image data because, for example, decoding processing such as moving image data is unnecessary. (Display data creation speed) becomes faster. When reading sprite image data capable of such high-speed processing from the image data memory 142, reading out image data that is relatively low-speed processing due to an increased processing load on the VDP 141, such as moving image data Compared to the above, by enabling reading from the image data memory 142 with a wider data bus width (a larger number of bits), the processing efficiency in the VDP 141 can be improved.

  In addition, by making it possible to change the bus width when reading image data, the flexibility in changing the storage capacity of the image data memory 142 can be enhanced as follows. That is, when the bus width cannot be changed, a memory chip corresponding to the bus width must be prepared. For example, even when the storage capacity of the image data memory 142 is increased, the memory capacity is commensurate with the increased storage capacity. It becomes difficult to prepare a memory chip, and the manufacturing cost may increase excessively due to, for example, a custom-made product. On the other hand, if the bus width can be changed, a memory chip corresponding to one of the changeable bus widths may be prepared. For example, even when the storage capacity of the image data memory 142 is increased, the increase is possible. It becomes easy to prepare a memory chip corresponding to the storage capacity to be increased, and an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed. In this way, the bus width of the data bus connected to the image data memory 142 can be set to any one of a plurality of types of bus widths, so that it is prepared when the storage capacity of the image data memory 142 is changed. The flexibility of the memory chip to be increased can be increased, and an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

  Further, for example, it is assumed that the memory chips 142-1 to 142-3 provided in the image data memory 142 as shown in FIG. 31 have the same storage capacity (for example, 1 gigabit). In this case, when the data bus connected to the image data memory 142 is always set to the maximum bus width (for example, 64 bits), for example, the chip chip signal CS # 0 is turned on to turn on the memory chip 142-1. The image data is read from the two memory chips, such as the image data is read from the memory chip 142-2. Therefore, even when the storage capacity of the image data memory 142 is increased, for example, two memory chips having the same storage capacity as each of the memory chips 142-1 to 142-3 must be added. Therefore, even if the data capacity of the image data stored in the image data memory 142 slightly exceeds the storage capacity in the image data memory 142, it is necessary to add at least two memory chips. Lack of flexibility. Here, instead of the memory chips 142-1, 142-2, the data bus has the maximum bus width (for example, 64 bits), and has a storage capacity (for example, a memory chip) larger than the storage capacity of the memory chip 142-3. Even when a single memory chip having a storage capacity twice as large as that of 142-3 is used, it is necessary to add a memory chip having a large storage capacity when the data capacity of the image data is slightly exceeded. Yes, it lacks flexibility when changing storage capacity.

  On the other hand, when the bus width of the data bus connected to the image data memory 142 can be set to a bus width (for example, 32 bits) smaller than the maximum bus width, for example, the chip select signal CS # It is only necessary that the image data can be read from one memory chip such that the image data is read only from the memory chip 142-3 when 1 is turned on. Therefore, even when the storage capacity of the image data memory 142 is increased, for example, memory chips having the same storage capacity as each of the memory chips 142-1 to 142-3 can be added one by one. In this way, by allowing the bus width of the data bus connected to the image data memory 142 to be set to any one of a plurality of types of bus widths, flexibility in changing the storage capacity of the image data memory 142 Can be increased.

  In addition, if the moving image data is stored in the memory chip 142-3 having a bus width smaller than the maximum bus width (for example, 32 bits) and the moving image data is read with the smaller bus width, For example, the storage capacity can be changed more flexibly than when moving image data is stored in both the memory chips 142-1 and 142-2 and read out with the maximum bus width. Can be improved.

  For example, in the process of step ST102 shown in FIG. 68, the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 transmits an enlarged display setting command from the input / output port 135 to the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121, and the VDP 141 uses the enlarged display setting command. By performing the corresponding setting, the enlargement ratio in the scaler circuit of the display circuit 158 is changed to the enlargement ratio for converting the display data having the SVGA mode size into the pixel data having the XGA mode size. Set. For example, in the process of step ST104 shown in FIG. 68, among the sprite image data stored in the main sprite image data area 142 of the image data memory 142, image data # 01- for displaying sprite images corresponding to the SVGA mode. Any of 01 to # 01-XX is read and used to create display data. In this way, when displaying a partially enlarged effect image, for example, image data having a large number of pixels, such as image data corresponding to the SVGA mode having a larger number of pixels than the VGA mode, is stored from the image data memory 142. Read out and display the effect image. Thereby, when enlarging an effect image, it can prevent that image quality falls, the effect effect by image display can be heightened, and the interest of a game can be improved.

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, in the above-described embodiment, by displaying the demonstration image or the effect image in the reach notice or the jackpot notice on the display screen of the second image display device 5B, information on the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, The explanation was given on the assumption that the notice effect by the display operation can be performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various effect operations can be performed by effect images displayed on the display screen of the second image display device 5B different from the first image display device 5A on which the decorative symbols are variably displayed. Anything can be done.

  For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 69, the variable winning device 50 is arranged at the center position of the gaming area and the first image display device 5A is installed above the variable winning device 50, while the second An image display device 5 </ b> B is installed on the inner rear surface of the variable prize winning device 50. FIG. 70 shows the variable winning device 50 in an enlarged manner. FIG. 71 shows a connection configuration example of the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 70, in the variable winning device 50, for example, a pair of left and right opening / closing members (honey) 30a, 30b are pivotally fixed. The opening / closing members 30a, 30b are connected to solenoids 83a, 83b shown in FIG. 71 via a link mechanism, and open / close the special winning openings 31a, 31b. When a game ball enters one of the big winning openings 31a, 31b, the game ball is detected by the left winning ball switch 42a or the right winning ball switch 42b, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out. Accordingly, the open state in which the special winning openings 31a, 31b are opened by the opening / closing members 30a, 30b is a first state advantageous to the player, whereas the special winning openings 31a, 31b are provided by the opening / closing members 30a, 30b. The closed state in which is closed is a second state that is disadvantageous to the player. As described above, in the variable winning device 50, the state changing operation is performed in which the large winning openings 31a and 31b are opened and then closed by the opening and closing members 30a and 30b.

  In the variable winning device 50 shown in FIG. 70, rolling plates 37a and 37b are provided below the special winning openings 31a and 31b. The rolling plates 37a and 37b have, for example, an inclination that is lowered toward the center of the winning space, and the game balls can roll on the rolling plates 37a and 37b toward the center of the winning space. . Between the rolling plates 37a and 37b, a sorting member 32 that is movable up and down is provided. The distribution member 32 is connected to a predetermined motor or solenoid via a link mechanism, and by driving the motor or solenoid, the distribution member 32 moves downward and moves downward and does not store (accommodate) game balls. Thus, it is possible to switch between a storable state in which a part (for example, nine) of game balls that have rolled on the rolling plates 37a and 37b are received and stored (accommodated). Here, when the distribution member 32 is maintained in the retracted state, the game balls that have rolled on the rolling plates 37 a and 37 b are not stored by the distribution member 32, and the side portion 34 a of the lower prize winning space as a normal guiding path is stored. , 34b is dropped. On the other hand, when the sorting member 32 moves upward after being stored and changes to the retracted state, the game balls stored by the sorting member 32 are released from the sorting member 32 and used as a specific guide path. The ball passes through a predetermined ball passage and is fed into the lower prize space from the ball discharge ports 33a and 33b. The sorting member 32 only needs to be in the retracted state after maintaining the storable state until a certain period elapses. Alternatively, for example, by performing a constant movement such as a rotation operation, the game balls that have been rolling on the rolling plates 37a and 37b are connected to the ball guide outlets 33a and 33b and the side portions of the lower winning space. It may be distributed to either 34a or 34b. A V winning opening 35 is provided at a position directly below the ball outlets 33a and 33b, and the game balls discharged from the ball outlets 33a and 33b fall on the side portions 34a and 34b of the lower winning space. It is guided to the V winning opening 35 at a higher rate than the game ball. A game ball that has entered the V winning opening 35 is detected by the V winning switch 41. The lower prize space is provided with a normal area 36 different from the V prize opening 35, and game balls that have not entered the V prize opening 35 are discharged from the variable prize winning device 50 via the normal area 36. Is done. A game ball discharged from the variable winning device 50 after entering the V winning opening 35, or a game ball discharged through the normal area 36 without entering the V winning opening 35 is shown in FIG. It is detected by the switch 43.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided with such a variable winning device 50, the special symbol display device 4 according to the fact that the game ball driven into the game area has won a start winning opening formed in the ordinary variable winning ball device 6. The execution condition for executing the variable display of the decorative symbol in the special figure game and the first image display device 5A is established. Based on the establishment of the execution condition, for example, in the first image display device 5A, variable display of decorative symbols is started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” variable display units. When the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a predetermined display result determined in advance as “small hit”, the opening / closing members 30a and 30b are predetermined for a predetermined number of times (for example, once or twice). After the special winning openings 31a and 31b are set to the open state which is the first state until the period (for example, 1 second) is reached, the small winning game state is set to the closed state which is the second state. At this time, when a game ball that has entered the open big winning holes 31a and 31b enters the V winning opening 35 and is detected by the V winning switch 41, the big winning game state is controlled. In this big hit gaming state, as in the above embodiment, the opening / closing plate of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 has a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls for the first period. In the period until it is generated, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened.

  FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process performed by the CPU 114 of the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 shown in FIG. 71 in step S15 shown in FIG. In the process shown in FIG. 72, first, similarly to steps S101 to S103 shown in FIG. 33, based on the check result of whether or not the detection signal from the start port switch 22 is in the ON state, the start winning process and the suspension are performed. It suffices if transmission settings for the storage number notification command are performed.

  Thereafter, in the processing shown in FIG. 72, in response to the value of the special symbol process flag being “1”, processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 73 is executed as the special symbol normal processing. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 73, when the random value MR1 does not match the big hit determination value data in step S204 (step S204; No), the data indicating the random value MR1 is the predetermined small hit determination value data. By determining whether or not they match, it is determined whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a big hit (step S215). Here, the small hit determination value data may be data indicating a value in a predetermined range of the random value MR1. As a specific example, a value in the range of “10001” to “31845” in the random value MR1 may be set so as to match the small hit determination value data. The small hit determination value data may be determined by table data of a small hit determination table stored in advance in the ROM 115 of the game control microcomputer 100.

  If the random value MR1 matches the small hit determination value data in step S215 (step S215; Yes), the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 162 is set to the on state (step S216). At this time, a special symbol predetermined as a small hit symbol (for example, a special symbol indicating “5”) is determined as a confirmed special symbol (step S217). On the other hand, if the random number MR1 does not match the small hit determination value data in step S215 (step S215; No), the process proceeds to step S210 which is the same as the process shown in FIG. In addition, after executing the process of step S217, the process proceeds to the process of step S211 which is the same as the process shown in FIG.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 69, a variable display pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result of a special symbol or a decorative symbol is a small hit is prepared in advance. In the variable display pattern setting process executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “1” in the process shown in FIG. 72, the small hit variable is corresponding to the fact that the small hit flag is on. A display pattern is determined. Then, a variable display start command corresponding to the determination result is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, so that the special symbol display device 4 can display the special symbol in response to variable display of the special symbol. In the first image display device 5A according to the variable display pattern, the decorative symbol is variably displayed. Here, in the variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to the variable display pattern for small hits, predetermined fixed decorative symbols (for example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” variable display predetermined as small hit combinations) It is only necessary to derive and display a combination of fixed decorative symbols that stop displaying decorative symbols whose symbol numbers are “1”, “3”, and “5”. In the case of a small hit, the decorative symbols are not variably displayed. For example, by displaying a predetermined effect image on the display screen of the first image display device 5A or the second image display device 5B, etc. You may make it alert | report that it becomes a hit. At this time, the special symbol display device 4 only needs to display a special symbol (for example, a special symbol whose symbol number is “1”) predetermined as the small hit symbol.

  In the special symbol stop process executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3” in the processing shown in FIG. 72, when it is determined that the big hit flag is off (for example, in step S241 shown in FIG. 36). Corresponding to the determination result of “No”), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is on. At this time, if the small hit flag is on, a small hit start start waiting time is set, and a setting for transmitting a predetermined effect control command as a small hit start command to the effect control board 12 is performed. . Then, the small hit flag is cleared and turned off, and the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “8” which is a value corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing, and then the same as step S250 shown in FIG. Proceed to the process. On the other hand, if the small hit flag is off, the process proceeds as it is in step S250 shown in FIG.

  72 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “8”. In the small hit opening pre-processing, the big winning openings 31a and 31b are opened before the large winning openings 31a and 31b provided in the variable winning device 50 are opened by the opening and closing members 30a and 30b in the small hit gaming state. This includes processing for setting the opening time, processing for supplying a driving signal for opening the special winning openings 31a and 31b to the solenoids 83a and 83b by the solenoid circuit 102, and the like. The small hit releasing process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “9”. This small hit opening process is a process of measuring the remaining time for opening the big winning openings 31a, 31b of the variable winning device 50 in the small hit gaming state using the special symbol process timer value, or the big winning opening 31a. , 31b to stop the supply of drive signals from the solenoid circuit 102 to the solenoids 83a and 83b in order to change the open state from the open state to the closed state. The small hit release post-processing in step S120 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “10”.

  FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing an example of the small hit releasing process executed in step S120 of FIG. In this small hit release post-processing, the CPU 114 first checks, for example, whether or not the detection signals from the left and right winning ball switches 42a and 42b are turned on to thereby determine the big winning opening 31a provided in the variable winning device 50. , 31b, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won (step S301). When the game ball wins either of the big winning openings 31a and 31b and the detection signal from either of the left and right winning ball switches 42a and 42b is turned on (step S301; Yes), the game control counter The prize winning count value that is the value of the prize winning counter provided in the setting unit 164 is updated by adding 1 (step S302). At this time, an operation setting for paying out a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is also performed in response to the game balls winning in either of the big winning openings 31a, 31b (step S303).

  When the detection signals from the left and right winning ball switches 42a and 42b are both in the OFF state in step S301 (step S301; No), after the processing of step S303 is executed, the detection signal from the discharge ball switch 43 is detected. It is determined whether or not the game ball is discharged from the variable winning device 50 by checking whether or not the game has been turned on (step S304). When the game ball is discharged from the variable winning device 50 and the detection signal from the discharge ball switch 43 is turned on (step S304; Yes), the value of the discharge ball counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 164 The discharged ball count value is updated by adding 1 (step S305).

  In step S304, when the detection signal from the discharge ball switch 43 is in an OFF state (step S304; No), after executing the process of step S305, it is determined whether or not waiting for discharge (step S304). S306). Here, the value of the special symbol process flag is not updated after the process of step S311 to be described later is performed, for example, when the process of step S306 is performed again in response to the next timer interrupt. Is determined to be waiting for discharge. On the other hand, if the process of step S306 is executed before the process of step S311 is executed after the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, it is determined that the process is not waiting for discharge.

  If it is not waiting for discharge in step S306 (step S306; No), it is determined whether or not winning ball detection is waiting (step S307). Here, the value of the special symbol process flag is not updated after the process of step S308 described later is executed, for example, when the process of step S307 is executed again in response to the next timer interrupt. Is determined to be waiting for winning ball detection. On the other hand, after the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, if the process of step S307 is executed before the process of step S308 is executed, it is determined that the winning ball detection is not waited.

  If it is not waiting for the winning ball detection in step S307 (step S307; No), the winning ball detection waiting time is set, for example, a predetermined timer initial value is set in the special symbol process timer (step S307). S308). After the process of step S308 is executed, the process after the small hit release is terminated. If the winning ball detection is waiting in step S307 (step S309; Yes), for example, it is determined whether or not a predetermined determination value is met after updating the special symbol process timer value. It is determined whether or not the detection waiting time has elapsed (step S309). At this time, if the winning ball detection waiting time has not elapsed (step S309; No), the small hit release post-processing is terminated.

  If the winning ball detection waiting time has elapsed in step S309 (step S309; Yes), it is determined whether or not the grand prize winning count value is “1” or more (step S310). . At this time, if the winning prize winning count value is equal to or greater than “1” (step S310; Yes), for example, a special symbol process timer is set based on the determination that there is a game ball that has entered the variable winning device 50. A discharge waiting time such as setting a predetermined timer initial value is set (step S311). On the other hand, when it is determined in step S310 that the value of the big prize opening winning count value is “0” and is less than “1” (step S310; No), the special symbol process flag is set. After the value is updated to “0” (step S312), the small hit release post-processing is terminated. When executing the process of step S312, it is preferable to clear the small hit flag and turn it off.

  When waiting for discharge in step S306 (step S306; Yes), it is determined whether or not the big winning opening winning count value matches the discharged ball count value (step S313). At this time, if the two count values match (step S313; Yes), for example, based on the determination that all the game balls that have entered the variable winning device 50 have been discharged, the detection result of the gaming balls by the V winning switch 41, for example. Based on the above, it is determined whether or not a game ball winning in the V winning opening 35 is detected (step S314).

  When the winning of the game ball to the V winning opening 35 is not detected in step S314 (step S314; No), the process proceeds to step S312. On the other hand, when the winning of the game ball is detected in step S314 (step S314; Yes), a big hit start production waiting time is set (step S315), and a big hit start command is transmitted. Setting is performed (step S316). At this time, it is preferable to clear the small hit flag and turn it off. Then, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is on (step S317). At this time, if the probability variation flag is on (step S317; Yes), the probability variation flag is cleared and turned off (step S318), the probability variation counter is cleared, and the probability variation count value is the initial setting value. 0 "is set (step S319). When the process of step S319 is executed, the probability variation end confirmation flag is set to the on state (step S320).

  When the probability variation flag is OFF in step S317 (step S317; No), after executing the process of step S320, the value of the special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for the big prize opening “4”. After updating to "" (step S321), the process after the small hit release is ended.

  If it is determined in step S313 that the winning prize count value does not match the discharged ball count value (step S313; No), it is determined whether or not the discharge waiting time has elapsed (step S322). At this time, if the discharge waiting time has not elapsed (step S322; No), the small hit release post-processing is terminated. If the discharge waiting time has elapsed in step S322 (step S322; Yes), a predetermined error process is executed (step S323), and the small hit release post-processing is terminated.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided with such a variable winning device 50, as a production control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12, for example, a small hit start indicating that a small hit gaming state is started. A command, a big winning ball detection command indicating that a winning game ball has been detected in one of the big winning ports 31a and 31b, and a V indicating that a gaming ball won in the V winning port 35 has been detected. A winning detection command is prepared in advance. The small hitting start command is such that when the variable symbol display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display result as a small hit, the small hitting flag is turned on, for example, in the special symbol stop process in step S113 shown in FIG. Corresponding to this, it is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. When a game ball that has won a prize in either of the prize winning openings 31a, 31b is detected, the prize winning ball detection command is sent from any of the left and right prize ball switches 42a, 42b, for example, in step S301 shown in FIG. In response to the detection signal being turned on, the signal is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The V winning ball detection command indicates that a game ball winning at the V winning opening 35 is detected in step S314 shown in FIG. 74, for example, in response to the detection of the gaming ball winning at the V winning opening 35. Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, for example, an effect in the small hit gaming state such as an effect display predetermined as an effect effect in the effect control pattern table 230 </ b> B stored in the ROM 132 included in the effect control microcomputer 120. A plurality of types of effect control patterns used for control are stored. As a specific example, the effect control pattern table 230B includes three types of small hit effect control selected in response to the reception of each command of a small hit start command, a big winning ball detection command, and a V winning detection command. Patterns # 1 to # 3 are stored.

  When a small hit start command is received from the main board 11, the small hit effect control pattern # 1 is set. In the small hit effect control pattern # 1, for example, in the same manner as the display control data for displaying the demo screen # 1 by the demonstration display effect control pattern shown in FIG. 57, the accessory shown in FIG. Display control data for displaying an effect image corresponding to effect # 1 on the display screen of the second image display device 5B is included.

  Also, when a big winning ball detection command is received from the main board 11, the small hit effect control pattern # 2 is set. In the small hit effect control pattern # 2, for example, in the same manner as the display control data for displaying the demonstration screen # 1 by the demonstration display effect control pattern shown in FIG. Display control data for displaying an effect image corresponding to effect # 2 on the display screen of the second image display device 5B is included.

  Furthermore, when a V winning detection command is received from the main board 11, the small hit effect control pattern # 3 is set. In the small hit effect control pattern # 3, for example, in the same manner as the display control data for displaying the demo screen # 1 by the demonstration display effect control pattern shown in FIG. 57, the accessory shown in FIG. Display control data for displaying an effect image corresponding to effect # 3 on the display screen of the second image display device 5B is included.

  By using such small hit effect control patterns # 1 to # 3, for example, the big winning openings 31a and 31b of the variable winning device 50 are opened on the display screen of the second image display device 5B. An effect image relating to the execution of the change action, or an effect image relating to a game based on the state change action, such as a game ball winning in the big prize opening 31a, 31b, or a game ball winning in the V prize opening 35, is displayed. be able to. Thus, according to various game modes, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by displaying various effect images on the second image display device 5B.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, the production | presentation control board 12 is provided with the display control part 121, the sound control part 122, and the lamp | ramp control part 123, and 5 A of 1st and 2nd image display apparatuses are under control of the production | presentation control board 12. The display operation in 5B, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting / extinguishing operation of the game effect lamp 9 and the like have been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a display control board on which a microcomputer is mounted is provided separately from the effect control board 12, and the display control unit 121 is mounted on the display control board. May be. In this case, the display control board receives a control signal from the presentation control board 12 by a microcomputer mounted separately from the presentation control microcomputer 120, and performs various controls in response to the control signal. You can do it. In addition, for example, a sound lamp control board on which a microcomputer is mounted may be provided separately from the effect control board 12, and the sound control unit 122 and the lamp control unit 123 may be mounted on the sound lamp control board. In this case, the sound lamp control board receives a control signal from the effect control board 12 by a microcomputer mounted separately from the effect control microcomputer 120, and performs various controls corresponding to the control signal. What should I do? Alternatively, from the sound lamp control board on which the sound control unit 122 and the lamp control unit 123 are mounted to control the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the lighting / extinguishing operation of the game effect lamp 9 and the like, the display control unit 121 is provided. Is transmitted to the display control board capable of controlling the display operation in the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B, and the sound lamp is operated by the microcomputer mounted on the display control board. A control signal from the control board may be received and various controls may be performed in response to the control signal. In this case, in the microcomputer mounted on the sound lamp control board, based on the reception of the control command from the main board 11, for example, a predetermined CPU outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 and the like. Processing for controlling the lighting / extinguishing operation or the like may be executed, and a control signal may be transmitted to the display control board based on a control command from the main board 11.

  In the above embodiment, in accordance with whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal gaming state or the probability variation gaming state, the setting of the enlargement ratio in the scaler circuit included in the display circuit 158 and the VGA mode are supported. It has been described that the setting is switched between using image data or using image data corresponding to the SVGA mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and relates to the setting of the enlargement ratio and the number of pixels of image data to be used based on the fact that a predetermined condition predetermined according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is satisfied. Any device that can change the setting may be used.

  For example, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal gaming state, the enlargement ratio in the scaler circuit included in the display circuit 158 is changed from display data having the size of the SVGA mode to pixel data having the size of the XGA mode. Set the zoom ratio so that conversion is possible. Then, image data corresponding to the SVGA mode is used as image data for displaying the effect image on the display screen of the first image display device 5A. On the other hand, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a special gaming state such as a probability variation gaming state or a time shortening state, the enlargement ratio in the scaler circuit included in the display circuit 158 is determined from the display data having the size of the VGA mode. The enlargement ratio is set so that conversion to pixel data having the size of the XGA mode can be performed. Then, image data corresponding to the VGA mode is used as image data for displaying the effect image on the display screen of the first image display device 5A. Here, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is longer in the period controlled in the normal gaming state than in the period controlled in the special gaming state such as the probability variation gaming state or the time shortening state. Normally, many variable displays of special symbols and decorative symbols are executed in the state. Therefore, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the normal gaming state, the effect data is displayed on the display screen of the first image display device 5A using the image data corresponding to the SVGA mode, so that the image data having a large number of pixels. Can be used to display effect images having a high display frequency, and the effect of image display can be improved by increasing the rate at which high-quality images are displayed.

  Alternatively, for example, when the decorative symbol variable display mode is normal loss or normal reach, the enlargement ratio in the scaler circuit included in the display circuit 158 is changed from the display data having the SVGA mode size to the XGA mode size. Set the zoom ratio so that it can be converted to pixel data. Then, image data corresponding to the SVGA mode is used as image data for displaying the effect image on the display screen of the first image display device 5A. On the other hand, the scaler provided in the display circuit 158 is used when the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is super reach, when the reach notification with high reliability is performed, or when the big hit notification with high reliability is performed. The enlargement ratio in the circuit is set to an enlargement ratio that enables conversion from display data having a VGA mode size to pixel data having an XGA mode size. Then, image data corresponding to the VGA mode is used as image data for displaying the effect image on the display screen of the first image display device 5A. Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is super reach, when the reach notification with high reliability is performed, or when the jackpot notification with high reliability is performed, it is normal. It is normal that there are more cases of lost or normal reach. Therefore, in the case of normal loss or reach loss, image data with a large number of pixels is used by displaying effect images on the display screen of the first image display device 5A using image data corresponding to the SVGA mode. Thus, it is possible to display an effect image having a high display frequency, and it is possible to increase an effect of displaying an image by increasing a ratio of displaying a high-quality image.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 76 (A), a movable member 60 capable of shielding a part of the display area on the display screen of the first image display device 5A is provided, and predetermined shielding switching is performed according to the progress of the game. Whether or not a part of the display area is shielded may be switched when the condition is satisfied. For example, in a state where a part of the display area is shielded as shown in FIG. 76A, the display area visible to the player on the display screen of the first image display device 5A has the size of the VGA mode. Shall.

  In this case, in the production control microcomputer 120, the CPU 131 responds to the variable display pattern indicated in the variable display start command, the type of variable display result, the determination result of whether to execute the reach notice and the jackpot notice, or the like. However, based on the effect control pattern set from the effect control pattern table 230A, in response to the establishment of a predetermined shielding switching condition, the movable member 60 is retracted so that the entire display area can be visually recognized. For example, the movable member 60 is connected to a solenoid via a predetermined link mechanism, and the movable member 60 is moved in response to a drive control signal output from the input / output port 135 by the CPU 131 of the production control microcomputer 120. Evacuate. As a more specific example, in the effect control pattern set when the variable display start command indicates a super variable display pattern, an effect control process timer corresponding to the timing when the decorative pattern variable display mode reaches reach Production control data indicating that the movable member 60 is retracted is included in association with the determination value. The CPU 131 makes a determination to switch whether or not the movable member 60 blocks a part of the display area based on the effect control data read from the effect control pattern based on the effect control process timer value. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 76 (B), at the timing when the variable display mode becomes reach, it is determined that switching is performed so as not to block a part of the display area, and the drive control signal according to the effect control data is sent. The movable member 60 is retracted by outputting from the input / output port 135.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 76A, in the period in which the movable member 60 advances and a part of the display area is shielded, the enlargement ratio in the scaler circuit included in the display circuit 158 has the size of the VGA mode. The enlargement ratio (eg, “1”) is set such that the display data is used as pixel data as it is. Then, image data corresponding to the VGA mode is used as image data for displaying the effect image on the display screen of the first image display device 5A. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 76B, during a period in which the movable member 60 is retracted and the entire display area can be visually recognized, for example, the CPU 131 displays an enlarged display from the input / output port 135 to the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121. By transmitting a setting command or the like, the enlargement ratio in the scaler circuit included in the display circuit 158 is changed so that the display data having the SVGA mode size can be converted into the pixel data having the XGA mode size. Set. Then, image data corresponding to the SVGA mode is used as image data for displaying the effect image on the display screen of the first image display device 5A. Thereby, for example, as shown in FIG. 76C, the effect image can be displayed on the entire display area of the display screen of the first image display device 5A. In this way, in response to the determination result of switching whether or not to block a part of the display area by the movable member 60, the setting relating to the setting of the enlargement factor and the number of pixels of the image data to be used is switched. Also good.

  Further, in response to switching whether or not a part of the display area is shielded by the movable member 60, the setting of the enlargement factor and the setting relating to the number of pixels of the image data to be used are not limited, and The setting of the enlargement ratio and the setting of the number of pixels of image data to be used may be changed before the fixed decorative symbol is derived and displayed after the variable display is started. For example, in the period before the timing when the variable display mode becomes reach after the variable display of the decorative design is started, VGA is used as image data for displaying the effect image on the display screen of the first image display device 5A. Use image data corresponding to the mode. Then, the enlargement ratio in the scaler circuit included in the display circuit 158 is set to an enlargement ratio for converting the display data having the VGA mode size into the pixel data having the XGA mode size. After that, at the timing when the variable display of the decorative design is reached, the enlargement ratio in the scaler circuit included in the display circuit 158 is converted from the display data having the SVGA mode size to the pixel data having the XGA mode size. Change to enlargement ratio to do. In a period after the reach is established, image data corresponding to the SVGA mode is used as image data for displaying the effect image on the display screen of the first image display device 5A. In this way, by changing the effect image and changing the enlargement rate when the decorative symbols are variably displayed, the effect based on the appropriate enlargement rate and image data according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 An image can be displayed, and the effect of the image display can be enhanced and the entertainment of the game can be improved.

  In the above embodiment, when the VDP 141 reads the sprite image data from the image data memory 142, the bus width of the data bus connected to the image data memory 142 is set regardless of the size (number of pixels) of the image data. In the above description, the first bus width is set to 64 bits. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the bus width of the data bus may be switched according to the size (number of pixels) of the sprite image data read from the image data memory 142. For example, when the image data corresponding to the SVGA mode is used when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the probability variation gaming state, the bus width of the data bus connected to the image data memory 142 is set to the first bus. Set the width to 64 bits. On the other hand, when using the image data corresponding to the VGA mode when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal gaming state, the bus width of the data bus connected to the image data memory 142 is Set to 32 bits, which is a bus width of 2. Here, when the display data for one frame having the size of the VGA mode is created, the image data to be used is compared with the case of creating the display data for one frame having the size of the SVGA mode. The amount of data is small, and the amount of image data transferred from the image data memory 142 is also small. Therefore, when creating display data having a smaller number of pixels than in the SVGA mode as in the VGA mode, the bus width when reading out the image data from the image data memory 142 is set to a display having a larger number of pixels. Even if it is set to be narrower (smaller number of bits) than when creating data, the VDP 141 can process the image data without any problem. Therefore, when creating display data with a small number of pixels, image data can be obtained with an optimal configuration and processing speed by narrowing the bus width compared to creating display data with a large number of pixels. Can be processed. In addition, flexibility in changing the storage capacity of the image data memory 142 can be enhanced.

  In the above embodiment, when the special display game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) without the variable display result being a big hit after the probability change game state, the probability change game state is assumed to end. It has been described that the probability change start command and the probability change end command are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 to notify the start and end of the probability change gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and after the probability variation game state is reached, regardless of the number of executions of the special figure game, the variable display result is continuously controlled to the probability variation game state until the next variable display result becomes a big hit. Thus, the probability change start command and the probability change end command may not be transmitted. In this case, from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, a special jackpot end command indicating that the jackpot gaming state based on the variable symbol display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol has become a normal jackpot, A probability variation jackpot end command indicating that the jackpot gaming state based on the fact that the variable display result of the symbol or decoration symbol is the probability variation jackpot is completed can be transmitted. The normal jackpot end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 in response to, for example, determining that the probability variation confirmation flag is OFF in step S262 of FIG. Further, the probability variation big hit end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 in response to, for example, determining that the probability variation confirmation flag is on in step S262 of FIG. In this case, when the big hit gaming state is finished, either the normal big hit end command or the probable change big hit end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. At the end of the special figure game, the probability variation end command is not transmitted as in the above embodiment, so the number of effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is reduced. It is possible to reduce the processing load for transmitting the effect control command on the main board 11 side.

  In the above-described embodiment, it is assumed that the command or process corresponding to the control data read in step S553 corresponding to the effect control process timer value updated in step S551 shown in FIG. 45 is performed in step S555. explained. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in step S555, commands and processes corresponding to various signals transmitted from the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121 may be performed. As an example, in step S555, in response to receiving the V blank interrupt signal from the VDP 141, a command for reading image data corresponding to the effect image to be displayed in the next frame (for example, an automatic transfer command or a fixed address). A designated transfer command or the like) may be transmitted from the input / output port 135 to the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121. In step S555, in response to the reception of the event interrupt signal from the VDP 141, a moving image decoding command for instructing decoding of a moving image to be reproduced and displayed in the next frame is sent from the input / output port 135 to the display control unit. You may transmit with respect to 121 VDP141. When the command corresponding to the signal transmitted from the VDP 141 is performed as described above, in the process of step S555, first, for example, a display control command to be transmitted to the VDP 141 is specified according to the control data read in step S553. The specified display control command is set to be transmittable. Thereafter, it waits until a predetermined signal such as a V blank interrupt signal or an event interrupt signal is received from the VDP 141. At this time, when there is no reception signal from the VDP 141 and a predetermined signal waiting time elapses, predetermined error processing is executed. On the other hand, if there is a received signal before the signal waiting time elapses, the previously set display control command is transmitted from the input / output port 135 to the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121. That's fine.

  In the above embodiment, if the probability change start flag is off in step S141 in FIG. 40, the advance transfer setting table 220A for the normal gaming state is set in step S142, while the probability change start flag is on. In this case, after setting the advance transfer setting table 220B for the probability variation gaming state in step S143, the advance transfer command created by executing the processing of steps S147 to S153 is transmitted to the VDP 141. In the VDP 141, each time a pre-transfer command is received, the transfer control circuit 152 reads image data from the image data memory 142 and writes it to the fixed address area 156 A of the temporary storage memory 156. In this way, a plurality of types of image data for displaying effect symbols in different display modes depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal gaming state or the probability variation gaming state is read from the image data memory 142. Temporary storage is performed in the fixed address area 156A of the temporary storage memory 156. Here, the reading speed of the stored data in the temporary storage memory 156 is faster than the reading speed of the stored data in the image data memory 142. Therefore, when displaying the effect image according to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the image data for displaying the effect image is not read from the image data memory 142, and the image is read from the fixed address area 156A of the temporary storage memory 156. By reading the data, it is possible to quickly perform a process for displaying the effect image.

  Here, the timing at which the display mode of the effect image is changed is not limited to the timing at which the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 shifts to the normal gaming state or the probability variation gaming state as in the above-described embodiment, but in the pachinko gaming machine 1 Any timing may be used as long as a predetermined change condition corresponding to the progress of the game is satisfied. For example, when a demonstration screen is displayed on the display screen of the first image display device 5A or the second image display device 5B, an operation switch provided so that a player or the like can operate with the pachinko gaming machine 1 When the operation switch signal is turned on, the change condition for changing the display mode of the effect image is satisfied, and the display frequency after the change of the display mode is set to be higher than the required effect image. For the image data corresponding to the rendered effect image, the transfer from the image data memory 142 to the fixed address area 156A of the temporary storage memory 156 may be instructed. In response to this, in the VDP 141, the transfer control circuit 152 may read the image data from the image data memory 142 and transfer it to the fixed address area 156A.

  In the above embodiment, as an example of the gaming machine, the description has been given using the pachinko gaming machine 1 having a function of variably displaying special symbols and decorative symbols and a function of displaying various effect images. However, the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the above embodiment, but can be applied to other gaming machines such as a slot machine. Hereinafter, a case where the present invention is applied to a slot machine which is an example of another gaming machine will be described.

  FIG. 77 is a front view of a slot machine 500 as an example of a slot machine to which the present invention is applied, and shows a layout of main members. The slot machine 500 is roughly composed of a housing whose front surface is open and a front door pivotally supported at a side end of the housing.

  Inside the casing of the slot machine 500, there is installed a variable display device 501 in which reels DL, DC, DR having a plurality of kinds of symbols arranged on the outer periphery are arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction. The front door of the slot machine 500 is provided with a first image display device 510A having a display function and a second image display device 510B. The first image display device 510A is provided with, for example, one transparent see-through window. For example, three consecutive symbols out of symbols arranged on the reels DL, DC, and DR can be seen from the see-through window. Is arranged.

  On the outer periphery of the reels DL, DC, DR, for example, “Red 7”, “White 7”, “BAR”, “JAC”, “Watermelon”, “Cherry”, “Bell”, which can be distinguished from each other Are drawn in a predetermined order. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheries of the reels DL, DC, and DR are displayed in upper, middle, and lower three stages through the perspective windows of the first image display device 510A.

  The reels DL, DC, DR are rotated by reel motors 651L, 651C, 651R (FIG. 78) provided in correspondence with each other, so that the symbols of the reels DL, DC, DR are those of the first image display device 510A. Displayed while continuously changing through the fluoroscopic window, and by stopping the rotation of each reel DL, DC, DR, three consecutive symbols are visually recognized through the fluoroscopic window of the first image display device 510A as display results. Derived and displayed as possible.

  Below the first image display device 510A on the front door of the slot machine 500, there is provided an operation table 520 on which various input switches and the like for the player to perform various operations are arranged. On the far side of the operation table 520, there are a medal insertion slot 502 into which medals can be inserted, a BET switch 503 for setting (BET) the number of bets for one medal, and the maximum number of bets that can be bet in one game ( MAXBET switch 504 for setting the number of bets (three in this example), used for setting the medal and bet number stored as credit (the number of medals stored as a player's own game value) A checkout switch 508 for paying out medals is provided. The medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 502 is detected by a predetermined insertion medal sensor.

  On the front side of the operation table 520, a start lever 505 operated when starting the game in the slot machine 500, stop switches 506L, 506C operated when stopping the rotation of the reels DL, DC, DR, respectively. 506R is provided. A medal payout exit 507 through which medals are paid out is provided at the bottom of the operation table 520.

  On the front door of the slot machine 500, on the upper part of the first image display device 510A, a second image display device 510B and a game information display unit for displaying various information related to games in the slot machine 500 are provided. . For example, the game information display unit displays a credit indicator that displays the number of medals stored as credits, an auxiliary display that displays the number of medals acquired in the big bonus, an error code indicating the contents when an error occurs, and the like And a payout display for displaying the number of medals paid out when a prize is generated. Two speakers 511L and 511R that emit sound effects are provided on the left and right sides of the game information display section. In addition, game effect lamps 512 are provided on the upper part of the image display device 510, and game effect lamps 513 and 514 are provided on the left and right sides of the operation table 520, respectively.

  When a game is played in the slot machine 500, first, medals are inserted from the medal insertion slot 502, or credits are used to set the number of bets. To use the credit, the BET switch 503 or the MAXBET switch 504 is operated. When the number of bets is set in this way, the pay lines L1 to L5 are valid, the operation of the start lever 505 is valid, that is, the game can be executed, and the variable display execution condition is satisfied. Even when a re-gamer winning such as replay occurs in the previous game, the next game can be executed continuously, and the variable display execution condition is satisfied.

  When the start lever 505 is operated in such a state that the game can be executed, based on the fact that the operation is detected by the start lever switch 505A (FIG. 78), the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, Each reel DL, DC, DR rotates, and the design of each reel DL, DC, DR varies continuously. If any one of the stop switches 506L, 506C, and 506R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels DL, DC, and DR is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed so as to be visible through the see-through window of the image display device 510. The

  Then, when the rotation of all the reels DL, DC, and DR is stopped, one game is finished, and each combination of symbols called predetermined roles on each of the activated pay lines L1 to L5 is displayed. When the display results of the reels DL, DC, DR are stopped, a winning is generated. The types of winning combinations are roughly divided into small roles with medals, re-players that can start the next game without the need to set the number of bets, and special cases that have a transition in gaming state. There is a role, and the winning combination is determined according to the gaming state. In the slot machine 500, an internal lottery is performed to determine whether or not the winning of each combination determined according to the gaming state is allowed based on the random number value extracted at the timing when the start lever 505 is operated. The fact that winning in this internal lottery and winning is permitted is also referred to as “internal winning”. Of the winning of each role, the winning of the small role and the replaying role is valid only in the game for which the winning is determined, but the winning of the special role has the roles allowed to be generated by the internal lottery. It is effective until. In other words, once the occurrence of a special winning combination is allowed, even if the special winning combination cannot be generated in each game, the winning is carried over to the next game.

  The gaming state in the slot machine 500 includes, for example, a regular bonus, a big bonus, and a normal gaming state. In the regular bonus game state, for example, small roles such as JAC, cherry, watermelon, and bell are defined as winning combinations and are subject to lottery in the internal lottery. In the big bonus, special small roles such as cherry, watermelon, and bell, and special bonuses such as regular bonus (or JACIN) are determined as winning roles in a predetermined small role game. It is a lottery target in the internal lottery. In the normal gaming state, for example, small roles such as cherry, watermelon and bell, replay roles such as replay, special roles such as big bonus, regular bonus, etc. are predetermined as winning roles, It is a lottery target in the lottery.

  When a special role winning that becomes a big bonus occurs in the normal gaming state, the gaming state shifts to the big bonus. With the big bonus, a predetermined game called a small role game can be played. The big bonus is ended when the total number of medals given to the player in the big bonus becomes equal to or more than a prescribed number (eg, 466). When a special role winning that becomes a regular bonus occurs in a small role game in a normal gaming state or a big bonus, the gaming state shifts to a regular bonus. The regular bonus ends when 12 games have been consumed or when 8 games have been won (any kind of combination can be used), whichever comes first. If the total number of medals awarded to the player during the big bonus exceeds the specified number with the regular bonus in the big bonus, the regular bonus is terminated together with the big bonus.

  In the slot machine 500, when the gaming state is shifted to a special gaming state such as a regular bonus or a big bonus, the player can acquire more medals than the normal gaming state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. It becomes a game state. Note that the special gaming state is not limited to a regular bonus or a big bonus, and it can be expected that the player will win more medals than the normal gaming state, and the gaming state may be more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. That's fine. As such a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, for example, an operation that satisfies the conditions for deriving notification target winnings that occur on condition that reel deriving conditions (for example, stop order and stop timing) are satisfied By restricting the gaming state (so-called assist time) in which the procedure is notified and the pull-in range of at least one of the reels, the symbols displayed when the stop switches 506L, 506C, 506R are operated are stopped. Challenge time (CT) that allows control to be easily controlled and allows players to derive a combination of winning symbols, and allow for specific winnings (such as replay winnings and single bonus winnings) Game state (so-called replay time or concentration state) that increases the probability of being played, and further combining these It may be any such tricks state.

  In the slot machine 500, for example, a main board 600, an effect control board 620, a reel unit 650 and the like as shown in FIG. 78 are mounted. In addition, other boards such as a power supply board and a relay board connected to the main board 600 are also mounted on the slot machine 500. The main board 600 is provided with a game control microcomputer 610. Similar to the game control microcomputer 100 in the above embodiment, the game control microcomputer 610 is a CPU that performs control according to a program, a ROM that stores user programs and data, and a RAM that is used by the CPU as a work area. And so on.

  The reel unit 650 includes reel motors 651L, 651C, 651R, a reel lamp 652, a reel sensor 653, and the like. The reel motors 651L, 651C, and 651R are motors for rotating the reels DL, DC, and DR. The reel lamp 652 is provided inside each reel DL, DC, DR, and irradiates a symbol that can be visually recognized by the variable display device 501 among the symbols drawn on each reel DL, DC, DR from the inside of the reel. It is a lamp to do. The reel sensor 653 is a sensor for detecting the rotation state and the rotation speed of each reel DL, DC, DR.

  On the effect control board 620, an effect control microcomputer 630, a display control unit 631, a sound control unit 632, a lamp control unit 633, and the like are mounted. The effect control microcomputer 630 is similar to the effect control microcomputer 120 in the above embodiment, a CPU that performs control according to a program, a ROM that stores user programs and data, and a RAM that is used by the CPU as a work area. And a reset / interrupt controller. The display control unit 631 controls the display operation in the first image display device 510A and the second image display device 510B, and from the effect control microcomputer 630, similarly to the display control unit 121 in the above embodiment. VDP that executes processing of image data in accordance with the display control command and various image data used for displaying the effect image on the display screen of the first image display device 510A or the second image display device 510B. And an image data memory to be stored.

  The VDP provided in the display control unit 631 includes a host interface, a transfer control circuit, an image data memory interface, a moving image decoder, a drawing circuit, a temporary storage memory, a frame buffer memory, a display circuit, and the like, as in the above embodiment. Is provided.

  In the effect control microcomputer 630, instructions for controlling the effect operations by the image display device 510, the speakers 511L and 511R, the game effect lamps 512 to 514, and the like according to the effect control pattern based on the effect control command received from the main board 600, Processing is executed by the CPU. In the display control unit 631, processing of image data in accordance with a display control command from the effect control microcomputer 630 is executed by the VDP.

  The transfer control circuit included in the VDP of the display control unit 631 is for effect control as in the case of executing the display data transfer process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 51 in step S609 shown in FIG. 47 in the above embodiment. In response to the display data transfer command from the microcomputer 630, the display data stored in the second display data area of the frame buffer memory is transferred to the variable address area of the temporary storage memory. Then, the CPU of the production control microcomputer 630, for example, in the same manner as the processing in step ST16 shown in FIG. 58, the processing in step ST36 shown in FIG. 61, the processing in step ST82 shown in FIG. Display data is read from the variable address area provided in the temporary storage memory provided in the VDP of the display control unit 631 and temporarily stored in the RAM of the effect control microcomputer 630. Thereafter, for example, similar to the processing in step ST18 shown in FIG. 58, the processing in step ST38 shown in FIG. 61, the processing in step ST84 shown in FIG. The display data thus supplied is supplied to an LCD drive circuit provided corresponding to the second image display device 510B. As a result, the LCD drive circuit displays the second image display in the same manner as the processing in step ST19 shown in FIG. 58, the processing in step ST39 shown in FIG. 61, the processing in step ST85 shown in FIG. The effect image is displayed on the display screen of the device 510B. Further, in the VDP of the display control unit 631, for example, the rendering circuit displays the effect image on the display screen of the first image display device 510A by writing display data into the first display data area of the frame buffer memory. Create display data for Thus, in the VDP for creating display data for displaying the effect image on the display screen of the first image display device 510A, for display for displaying the effect image on the display screen of the second image display device 510B. Data is created, and the effect image can be displayed on the display screen of the second image display device 510B by the CPU of the effect control microcomputer 630. Thereby, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated VDP or microcomputer to display the effect image on the second image display device 510B, and an increase in manufacturing cost can be prevented.

  The CPU of the effect control microcomputer 630 and the VDP of the display control unit 631 execute, for example, the same processes as the processes of steps ST55 to ST59 shown in FIG. 63 and the processes of steps ST75 to ST86 shown in FIG. As a result, in response to the passage of the image frame period in the first image display device 510A and the second image display device 510B, a plurality of types of images created for each moving image data read from the image data memory of the display control unit 631. A plurality of display areas provided on the display screens of the first image display device 510A and the second image display device 510B by writing and storing display data in a frame buffer memory included in the VDP of the display control unit 631 in a predetermined order. Different types of moving images can be displayed for each. As a result, every time the image frame period in the first image display device 510A or the second image display device 510B elapses, all of the plurality of types of display data created for each of the plurality of types of moving image data are stored in the display control unit 631. Compared with the case where data is written and stored in the frame buffer memory provided in the VDP, it is possible to reduce the processing load required to display a moving image, and to prevent a lack of effects for displaying a moving image. Further, since the moving image data for displaying a plurality of types of moving images may be prepared with the number of frames corresponding to the timing at which the display data is created, the data capacity can be reduced.

  Further, similarly to the process of step ST80 shown in FIG. 66 in the above embodiment, for example, the display data of the moving image A2 is converted into the second display data provided in the frame buffer memory provided in the VDP of the display control unit 631. The data is transferred from the area to a variable address area provided in a temporary storage memory provided in the VDP of the display control unit 631. Then, in the same manner as the process of step ST82 shown in FIG. 66 in the above embodiment, the CPU of the effect control microcomputer 630 stores in the variable address area provided in the temporary storage memory provided in the VDP of the display control unit 631. The displayed display data is read out and temporarily stored in the RAM of the effect control microcomputer 630. Thereafter, in the same manner as the process in step ST84 shown in FIG. 66 in the above embodiment, the display data stored in the RAM of the effect control microcomputer 630 is provided corresponding to the second image display device 510B. Supply to the drive circuit. Thereby, the LCD drive circuit displays the moving image A2 on the display screen of the second image display device 510B in the same manner as the process of step ST85 shown in FIG. 66 in the above embodiment.

  In the VDP of the display control unit 631, for example, the display data created by the drawing circuit based on the moving image data read from the image data memory is written in the first display data area of the frame buffer memory. Then, display data for displaying a moving image on the display screen of the first image display device 510A is created. In this way, in the VDP for creating display data for displaying a moving image on the display screen of the first image display device 510A, for displaying the moving image on the display screen of the second image display device 510B. Data is created and the moving image can be displayed on the display screen of the second image display device 510B by the CPU of the effect control microcomputer 630. Accordingly, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated VDP or microcomputer for displaying the moving image on the second image display device 510B, and an increase in manufacturing cost can be prevented.

  The main sprite image data area provided in the image data memory of the display control unit 631 is similar to the main sprite image data area 142A of the image data memory 142 in the above embodiment, on the display screen of the first image display device 510A. As image data corresponding to the number of pixels smaller than the number of pixels in the XGA mode corresponding to the total number of pixels, image data for sprite image display corresponding to the SVGA mode and image data for sprite image display corresponding to the VGA mode are included. It is remembered. For example, when the gaming state in the slot machine 500 becomes a special gaming state, or when the lottery result in the internal lottery becomes a special role such as a big bonus or a regular bonus, the predetermined flag is set to an on state. When a predetermined image switching condition is established corresponding to the progress of the game as in the case where the game has been performed, for example, the CPU of the effect control microcomputer 630 performs the process of step S502 shown in FIG. 43 in the above embodiment. Similarly, a predetermined display control command is transmitted from the input / output port to the VDP of the display control unit 631, and a setting corresponding to the display control command is performed in the VDP. And settings related to the number of pixels of image data to be used are changed. As a result, the data capacity is reduced as compared with the case where image data having the same number of pixels as the total number of pixels on the display screen of the first image display device 510A is stored in the image data memory and used to display the effect image. The storage capacity in the data memory can be reduced. Further, for example, the data capacity of display data written in the frame buffer memory by the VDP drawing circuit is reduced, so that it is possible to prevent an increase in the processing load for creating display data. Then, by changing the setting of the enlargement ratio and the number of pixels of the image data to be used when a predetermined image switching condition such as a special gaming state is satisfied, for example, according to the gaming state in the slot machine 500 An effect image can be displayed with an appropriate enlargement ratio and image data, and the effect of the image display can be enhanced to improve the interest of the game.

  The CPU of the effect control microcomputer 630 performs a predetermined display control command from the input / output port to the VDP of the display control unit 631 in the same manner as the processing of step S502 and step S505 shown in FIG. Is transmitted, and setting corresponding to the display control command is performed by VDP. At this time, the bus width of the data bus connected to the image data memory of the display control unit 631 is set to 64 bits which is the first bus width. On the other hand, the CPU of the effect control microcomputer 630 executes the same process as the process of step ST53 shown in FIG. 63 and the process of step ST73 shown in FIG. Then, a predetermined display control command is transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 631, and setting corresponding to the display control command is performed by the VDP. At this time, the bus width of the data bus connected to the image data memory of the display control unit 631 is set to 32 bits which is the second bus width.

  As described above, when the sprite image data is used to display the effect image on the display screen of the first image display device 510A or the second image display device 510B, the sprite image data is displayed from the image data memory of the display control unit 631. The bus width when reading is read as the first bus width. On the other hand, when moving image data is used to reproduce and display a moving image as an effect image on the display screen of the first image display device 510A or the second image display device 510B, the image data memory of the display control unit 631 is used. The bus width for reading moving image data from the second bus width is narrower than the first bus width (the number of bits is small). As a result, the processing efficiency of the display control unit 631 in the VDP can be improved, and the flexibility in changing the storage capacity of the image data memory of the display control unit 631 can be increased.

  For example, the CPU of the effect control microcomputer 630 transmits a predetermined display control command from the input / output port to the VDP of the display control unit 631 in the same manner as the process of step ST102 shown in FIG. , Conversion of the enlargement ratio in the scaler circuit of the display circuit from the display data having the size of the SVGA mode to the pixel data having the size of the XGA mode by setting corresponding to the display control command in the VDP. Set to the enlargement ratio for performing. Further, for example, in the same manner as the processing of step ST104 shown in FIG. 68 in the above embodiment, SVGA among the sprite image data stored in the main sprite image data area provided in the image data memory of the display control unit 631. Any of the sprite image display image data corresponding to the mode is read and used to create display data. Thus, when displaying a partially enlarged effect image, for example, image data having a large number of pixels, such as image data corresponding to the SVGA mode having a larger number of pixels than the VGA mode, is displayed in the display control unit 631. An effect image is displayed by reading from the image data memory. Thereby, when enlarging an effect image, it can prevent that image quality falls, the effect effect by image display can be heightened, and the interest of a game can be improved.

  In addition, if the gaming machine of the present invention has an image display device in a ball game machine such as a pachinko game machine, for example, a general electric machine or a ball game machine with a probability setting function called a Pachi-Con It does not matter. In addition, the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of prize balls in response to detection of a winning ball. It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine.

  Furthermore, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a slot machine that can play a game using medals and credits, for example, a slot machine that plays a game using pachinko balls, or credits without medals being discharged to the outside. The present invention can also be applied to a complete credit type slot machine that can be played using the game, an image type slot machine in which a variable display device is displayed as an image, and the like.

  The present invention can also be applied to a game machine that simulates the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the slot machine 500. The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided to a computer device or the like by a detachable recording medium, but preinstalled in a storage device such as a computer device or the like in advance. You may take the form distributed by keeping it. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of a decoration design. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the microcomputer for game control. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value counted by the side of a main board | substrate. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a pattern determination table. It is a figure which illustrates the selection probability of reach pattern, and the reliability of reach. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in a normal variable display pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the variable display pattern of multi A. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the variable display pattern of multi B. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the variable display pattern of multi C. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the microcomputer for production control, and a display control part. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the effect image of reach notice. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the effect image of jackpot notice. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a prior transfer setting table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of an effect control pattern table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of an effect control pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of an effect control pattern table. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the effect image used as a demonstration screen. It is a figure which shows an example of the address map in a temporary memory. It is a figure which shows an example of the address map in a frame buffer memory. It is a figure which shows the structural example of an index table. It is a figure which shows an example of the display control command transmitted to VDP from the microcomputer for production control. It is a figure which shows an example of the address map in an image data memory. It is a figure which illustrates the image data memorize | stored in the main sprite image data area. It is a figure which illustrates the image data memorize | stored in a sub sprite image data area. It is a figure which illustrates the image data memorize | stored in the main moving image data area It is a figure which illustrates the image data memorize | stored in a sub moving image data area It is a figure which shows the structural example of an image data memory. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a memory area setting command process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prior transfer command process. It is a figure which illustrates the processing content performed by command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design variable display setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during decorative design variable display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an image update command process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a transfer control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a storage area setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a pre-transfer process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an automatic transfer control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the data transfer process for a display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a drawing process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fixed address designation drawing process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an automatic transfer drawing process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a moving image decoding process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of the image data processing operation | movement in a display control part. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the demonstration control effect for demonstration displays. It is a flowchart which illustrates the process of a demonstration screen display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of the data processing operation for displaying a demo screen. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a normal B4 effect control pattern. It is a flowchart which illustrates the process of reach notice # 3 display. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a multi-A big hit effect control pattern. It is a flowchart which illustrates the process of multi A pattern # 1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the expansion | deployment timing of the data for a display. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a multi-A big hit effect control pattern. It is a flowchart which illustrates the process of multi A pattern # 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a super jackpot effect control pattern. It is a flowchart which illustrates the process of a partial expansion display. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the modification It is a figure which expands and shows a variable winning apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine in a modification. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol process process in a modification. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal process in a modification. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process after a small hit release | release in a modification. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the effect image in an accessory effect. It is a figure which shows the operation example in the case of shielding a display area using a movable member. It is a front view of the slot machine to which this invention is applied. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the slot machine.

Explanation of symbols

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Gaming machine frame 4 ... Special symbol display device 5A, 5B ... Image display device 6 ... Ordinary variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game Effect lamp 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Signal relay board 20 ... Normal symbol display device 21 ... Gate switch 22 ... Start-up switch 23 ... Count switch 25 ... Pass gate 81, 82 ... Solenoid 100 ... Micro for game control Computer 101 ... Switch circuit 102 ... Solenoid circuit 111 ... Clock circuit 112 ... Reset / interrupt controller 113, 134 ... Random number circuits 114, 131 ... CPU
115, 132 ... ROM
116, 133 ... RAM
117 ... Timer circuit 118 ... Serial communication circuit 119, 135 ... I / O port 120 ... Production control microcomputer 121 ... Display control unit 122 ... Sound control unit 123 ... Lamp control unit 125 ... LCD drive circuit 141 ... VDP
142 ... image data memory 151 ... host interface 152 ... transfer control circuit 153 ... image data memory interface 154 ... moving picture decoder 155 ... drawing circuit 156 ... temporary storage memory 157 ... frame buffer memory 158 ... display circuit

Claims (9)

Based on the fact that the variable display start condition is satisfied after the variable display execution condition is satisfied, variable display means is provided for variably displaying each of a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified. A gaming machine that is in a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player after a predetermined specific display result is obtained,
Image display means for displaying various images including a plurality of types of effect images;
A game control CPU for controlling the progress of the game;
A display control CPU for controlling a display operation of the image display means based on display information determined by the game control CPU;
Image data storage means for storing a plurality of types of image data corresponding to a plurality of types of effect images;
Display data is created based on a control command from the display control CPU and image data read from the image data storage means, and then an effect image is displayed on the image display means based on the display data. An image processor,
The image data stored by the image data storage means is
First image data configured to correspond to a smaller number of pixels than the total number of pixels corresponding to the image display means;
Unlike the corresponding number of pixels of the first image data, the second image data configured to correspond to a smaller number of pixels than the total number of pixels corresponding to the image display means,
The image processor is
Display data creation means for creating display data based on the image data read from the image data storage means;
The effect image corresponding to the display data created by the display data creation means is enlarged at a predetermined enlargement ratio according to a predetermined command from the display control CPU, and the total number of pixels corresponding to the image display means And an enlarged display processing means for displaying on the image display means as an effect image,
The display control CPU is:
An effect image corresponding to the first image data and an effect image corresponding to the second image data are displayed as the effect image displayed on the image display means when a predetermined image switching condition is established corresponding to the progress of the game. Effect image switching determination means for determining to switch between,
In response to a determination result by the effect image switching determination unit, an enlargement rate changing unit at the time of image switching for changing the enlargement rate of the effect image by transmitting the predetermined command to the enlarged display processing unit;
An image for changing the image data read from the image data storage means between the effect image corresponding to the first image data and the effect image corresponding to the second image data in accordance with the determination result by the effect image switching determination means. and a switching time of reading data change means only including,
The image processor further includes:
Temporary storage means capable of temporarily storing image data read from the image data storage means;
Display data creation means for creating display data based on the image data temporarily stored in the temporary storage means;
Transfer control means for controlling transfer of image data read from the image data storage means to the temporary storage means;
A storage area setting means for setting a storage area in the temporary storage means to a plurality of areas including a predetermined storage area in response to activation of the display control CPU;
The display control CPU further includes:
After setting the storage area by the storage area setting means, the execution frequency of the image display by the effect image corresponding to the image data among the plurality of types of image data stored in the image data storage means is the required image data. Start-up data transfer command means for commanding transfer of image data higher than the execution frequency of image display by a corresponding effect image to a storage area other than the predetermined storage area;
Effect image update command means for notifying the image processor of the read position of the image data and the write position in the display data storage means and instructing the update of the effect image;
The transfer control means includes
In response to a command from the startup data transfer command means, the execution frequency of the image display by the effect image corresponding to the image data among the plurality of types of image data stored in the image data storage means is the required image. Start-up data transfer means for reading out image data from the image data storage means and transferring it to a storage area other than the predetermined storage area in the temporary storage means, compared to the execution frequency of the image display by the effect image corresponding to the data When,
When the read position of the image data notified from the effect image update command means is included in the image data storage means, image data is read from the read position in the image data storage means and the predetermined storage in the temporary storage means Normal data transfer means for transferring to the area,
The display data creation means includes:
After the image data is transferred to the predetermined storage area by the normal data transfer means, the image data is read from the predetermined storage area and notified from the effect image update command means in the display data storage means. First data writing processing means for writing and storing in the loading position;
When the read position of the image data notified from the effect image update command means is included in the temporary storage means, the image data is read from the read position in the temporary storage means and notified from the effect image update command means. Second data writing processing means for writing and storing at a writing position in the display data storage means,
A gaming machine characterized by that. A movable member capable of shielding a part of the display area on the display screen of the image display means;
The display control CPU is:
Shielding switching determining means for determining whether or not to shield by the movable member when a predetermined shielding switching condition is established corresponding to the progress of the game;
Corresponding to the determination result by the shielding switching determining means, the shielding switching enlargement ratio changing means for changing the enlargement ratio of the effect image by transmitting the predetermined command to the enlarged display processing means,
Corresponding to the determination result by the shielding switching determining means, the shielding switching for changing the image data read from the image data storage means between the effect image corresponding to the first image data and the effect image corresponding to the second image data. Including read-out data changing means,
The gaming machine according to claim 1. The display control CPU is:
After the variable display of the identification information is started and before the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed, the effect image displayed on the image display means is the effect image corresponding to the first image data and the second image data. Variable display during switching determination means for determining to switch between effect images corresponding to,
In response to the determination result by the variable display switching determination means, variable display enlargement ratio changing means for changing the enlargement ratio of the effect image by transmitting the predetermined command to the enlargement display processing means,
In response to the determination result by the variable display switching determination unit, the image data read from the image data storage unit is changed between the effect image corresponding to the first image data and the effect image corresponding to the second image data. Including variable display read data changing means,
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that. The display control CPU is:
First bus width setting means for setting a data bus width when the image processor reads predetermined image data from the image data storage means to a first bus width;
Second bus width setting means for setting a data bus width when the image processor reads image data other than the predetermined image data from the image data storage means to a second bus width different from the first bus width. Including
The gaming machine according to claim 1, 2, or 3. The display control CPU displays an effect image corresponding to image data having a large number of pixels among the first and second image data on the image display means when the enlargement ratio of the effect image in the enlargement display processing means is large. Including high-resolution image display determining means for determining to
In response to the determination by the high-resolution image display determination unit, the image processor reads out image data having a large number of pixels from the first and second image data from the image data storage unit and produces an effect image on the image display unit. Including high-resolution display processing means for displaying
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, characterized in that: The display control CPU is:
When a predetermined selection condition is satisfied, the display mode of the effect image is selected from a plurality of types of display modes, and the effect is displayed on the image display unit corresponding to the selected display mode of the effect image Effect mode switching determining means for determining that the image is switched between the effect image corresponding to the first image data and the effect image corresponding to the second image data;
In response to the determination result by the effect mode switching determination unit, an enlargement rate changing unit at the time of effect mode switching that transmits the predetermined command to the enlargement display processing unit to change the enlargement rate of the effect image;
An effect of changing the image data read from the image data storage means between the effect image corresponding to the first image data and the effect image corresponding to the second image data in accordance with the determination result by the effect mode switching determination means. Read data changing means at the time of mode switching,
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5, characterized in that: When the predetermined transfer condition is satisfied, the display control CPU can execute the image display frequency of the effect image corresponding to the image element data among the plurality of types of image data stored in the image data storage unit. Including transfer condition establishment command means for instructing transfer of image data higher than the execution frequency of image display by the effect image corresponding to the required image data to a storage area other than the predetermined storage area;
The transfer control unit is configured to display an image by an effect image corresponding to the image data among a plurality of types of image data stored in the image data storage unit in response to a command from the command unit when the transfer condition is established. Image data whose execution frequency is higher than the execution frequency of the image display by the effect image corresponding to the required image data is read from the image data storage means and stored in a storage area other than the predetermined storage area in the temporary storage means. Including transfer means when transfer condition is established,
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 6 , characterized in that: A storage management table for enabling the transfer control means to specify transfer completion data indicating that data transfer from the image data storage means to the temporary storage means is completed, and image data temporarily stored in the temporary storage means; Including transfer completion data setting means to set to
The display data creating means writes the image data read from the temporary storage means into the display data storage means in response to whether transfer completion data is set in the storage management table. Including a creation decision means for deciding whether to execute creation of data,
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 7 , characterized in that: The display control CPU is:
Corresponding to the display mode of the effect image determined when a predetermined determination condition is satisfied, the effect image corresponding to the image data among the plurality of types of image data stored in the image data storage means Data specifying means for specifying image data whose execution frequency of image display is higher than the execution frequency of image display by an effect image corresponding to required image data;
Corresponding to the determination condition being satisfied, a determination condition satisfaction time instruction means for instructing to transfer the image data specified by the data specifying means to a storage area other than the predetermined storage area,
The transfer control means, in response to a command from the command means when the decision condition is satisfied, out of a plurality of types of image data stored in the image data storage means for displaying an image by an effect image corresponding to the image data. Image data whose execution frequency is higher than the execution frequency of the image display by the effect image corresponding to the required image data is read from the image data storage means and stored in a storage area other than the predetermined storage area in the temporary storage means. Including transfer means when the decision condition to transfer is established,
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 8 , characterized in that:

Images